JP2018082840A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To make it possible to enhance amusement when returning move presentation means to a first position after having moved the same from the first position to a second position.SOLUTION: A game machine is provided capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the game machine including move presentation means capable of making a move. Between when a mode in which the move presentation means moves from a first position to a second position and after that returns to the first position is a first mode and when the mode is a second mode different from the first mode, probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium is awarded to a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Furthermore, variable display means for displaying the identification information in a variable manner when the game medium wins in the winning area is provided, and when the variable display result of the identification information in the variable display means becomes a specific display result, a “big hit” is given. Some are configured to be controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a person.

  In such a gaming machine, it is suggested that after the movement effect means is moved from the first position toward the second position to suggest a ratio that is controlled to an advantageous state, the movement effect means is returned to the first position. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-042662 A

  With the technique described in Patent Document 1, it is not possible to increase the interest of the player's game when the movement effecting unit is moved from the first position to the second position and then returned to the first position.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and is a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a player's game when the movement effecting means is moved from the first position to the second position and then returned to the first position. For the purpose of provision.

  (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present application performs variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol), and is advantageous for the player (for example, A game machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can be controlled to a big hit game state), and a movable display means (for example, a movable display member 60) and a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed ( For example, the specific display means (for example, active display unit 18d) capable of displaying active display) and the display mode of the specific display in the first mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red)). And a change effect that changes to any one of a plurality of display modes including a second mode (for example, the first display mode (blue)) having a lower degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode. For example, the active display variable Change effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105) and the first timing during variable display (for example, after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. The display mode of the specific display changes between the first timing before the start of reach) and the second timing after the first timing (for example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 47 and before the stop of fluctuation). The suggestion effect execution means (for example, the portion where the effect control microcomputer 115 executes Steps S8006 and S8105) capable of executing the suggestion effect that suggests to perform, and the display mode of the specific display at the second timing is the first Suggestion effect restriction means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect that suggests changing to two modes ( For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the change suggestion pattern 2-3 in which the true suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) is performed at the second timing is not determined. As shown in FIG. 49 (A), the change pattern 2-1 is forbidden from executing a false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. When the movement effect means moves from the first position toward the second position and then returns toward the first position, the second aspect is different from the first aspect. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different from that in the above-described mode (for example, the mode in which the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns toward the retracted position is a movable object notice. Production YPA4 ~ YPA7 And to return while urchin rotated, in the case of return without rotation as a moving object when announcement attraction YPA1～YPA3, it jackpot expectations differ etc.), characterized in.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the player's game when returning after the movement effect means has moved.

  (2) In the gaming machine of the above (1), the combination of the mode when the movement effecting unit moves from the first position toward the second position and the mode when returning toward the first position is the first. The ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different between the combination of the first combination and the second combination different from the first combination (for example, in the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward). If attention is paid only, the big hit expectation is higher when the movable effect member 60 is rotated than when it is not rotated, and the big hit expectation is higher when the light emitter is flashed than when the flash is not turned on, If attention is also paid to the effect mode from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances, the effect of the movable effect member 60 depends on whether the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 after the move effect member 60 advances. Sometimes, even when the movable effect member 60 does not rotate, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than when the movable effect member 60 rotates, and when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, even when the light emitter does not light the flash, the big hit expectation degree May be high).

  In such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the player's game when returning after moving the moving effect means by noting the combination of the moving effect means and the returning mode. it can.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the movement effect means is a display device (for example, a sub image display device 65), and the display device moves from the first position toward the second position. The operation mode when returning to the first position is the same, but the display mode of the display device when returning is the first display mode and the first display mode is different from the first display mode. (2), the character CA1 jumps out from the sub-image display device 65 to the image display device 5 in a bread-eating competition effect, for example. When the effect image of the success mode such as the pan PA1 displayed on the image display device 5 is added with the mouth, the finalized special symbol that becomes the big hit symbol and the finalized decorative symbol that constitutes the big hit combination are derived. Thus, while the player can recognize that the variable display result is “big hit”, the character CA1 cannot jump out from the sub image display device 65 to the image display device 5 due to the bread eating competition effect. When the effect image of the failure mode such that the pan PA1 displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be held in the mouth is displayed, the fixed special symbol that becomes the lost symbol and the finalized decorative symbol that constitutes the reach lost combination are derived. Then, the player may be able to recognize that the variable display result is “losing” in a recognizable manner.

  In such a configuration, by paying attention to the display mode of the display device, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player's game when the movement effect unit returns after moving.

  (4) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (3), the game machine further includes effect means different from the movement effect means (for example, a light emitter such as a decoration LED incorporated in the movable effect member 60). When the moving effect means is moved from the first position toward the second position and then returns to the first position, the effect aspect of the effect means is the first effect aspect, and the first The proportion controlled in the advantageous state is different from that in the second effect mode different from the effect mode (for example, when the illuminant is flashed when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward as in the movable object notice effect YPA6). In other words, the big hit expectation degree may be higher compared to the case where the flash is not turned on as in the movable object notice effect YPA4).

  In such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player's game when returning after the movement effect means has moved by focusing attention on the effect mode of the effect means different from the movement effect means.

  (5) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (4), when the moving effect means moves from the first position toward the second position and then returns toward the first position, the power source When the movement effect means is turned off, the movement effect means is directed to the first position in a common manner after the power is turned on again, regardless of the manner in which the movement effect means returns before the power is turned off. Return (For example, when the movable effect member 60 is moved from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then the power is shut off when returning to the retracted position as in Modification 3, the movable effect member 60 is movable before the power is shut off. Regardless of the manner in which the effect member 60 returns, the movable effect member 60 may be returned to the retracted position in a common manner after the power is turned on again).

  In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the power is turned on again.

  (6) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (5), the second control for operating the movement effect means based on the first control means and a command transmitted from the first control means. And the second control means invalidates the received command if the movement effect means cannot be operated when the command is received from the first control means (for example, a modified example) 4, when the motor drive circuit 16 cannot operate the movable effect member 60 when receiving a drive command signal as an information signal indicating a predetermined drive command command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the drive command command indicated by the received drive command signal may be invalidated).

  In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a trouble from occurring in the moving effect means and to distribute the processing load.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on (7)-(12) shown below is contained in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes a specific display result in the variable display device, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine). In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display device by operating the start lever, and the player By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine). The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started in the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game. In the variable display device, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left, middle, and right symbols) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-208082 displays a specific display corresponding to variable display (for example, the hold icon), and suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes. It describes that the display mode of the specific display is changed after the performance is performed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-208082, the display mode of the specific display after the change (that is, the reliability with respect to the big hit) is suggested by the mode of the suggested performance. Depending on the situation, it is suggested that there is a low possibility of being a big hit, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced. Then, the invention which concerns on (7)-(12) aims at providing the gaming machine which can prevent that the interest of a game will fall.

(7) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (6), after the variable display is started, a specific effect that informs whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, super reach) Specific execution executing means (for example, the part in which the production control microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105), and the second timing is a period during which the specific effect is executed (in this example, FIG. 47). The second timing may be reached after the start of the super reach shown in FIG.
In such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the specific performance.

  (8) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), the suggestion effect execution means is an expectation that the display mode of the specific display is controlled to be more advantageous than the second mode at the second timing. A suggestion effect that suggests changing to a high display mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red)) may be executed.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

(9) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the suggestion effect execution means changes a plurality of effect modes having different degrees of expectation (for example, the display mode of the active display after the effect changes) It is also possible to execute the suggestion effect of the first mode and the second mode (which are true suggestion effects) and the expectation level or the expectation level that is a big hit (see FIG. 49D).
In such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

  (10) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (9), the suggestion effect execution means includes a first suggestion effect (for example, a true suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and an effect A second suggestion effect (for example, a false suggestion effect) in which the display mode of the specific display does not change later can be executed, and the second timing has a higher ratio of executing the first suggestion effect than the first timing ( For example, as shown in Fig. 49 (C), the ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is higher at the first timing than at the second timing, that is, the second timing is more true than the first timing. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect may be high).

  In such a configuration, attention can be paid to the suggestive effect executed at the second timing.

  (11) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (10), the suggestion effect execution means is at least regardless of which display mode of the plurality of display modes is suggested. A suggestion effect is executed in a manner in which some are common (for example, when suggesting which display mode the active display changes to, the first mode in which character A appears or the second mode in which character B appears) (See FIG. 53).

  In such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be easily recognized.

  (12) Any one of the above-described (1) to (11) includes variable display means (for example, the image display device 5) capable of executing variable display, and the variable display means starts variable display. The variable display can be performed a predetermined number of times until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (for example, pseudo-continuous production), and the specific display can be performed according to the type of the predetermined variable display. The timing at which the display mode changes is different (for example, the execution timing of the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is determined at a determination ratio according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determined according to whether or not the big hit determination is made (See FIG. 54).

  In such a configuration, the production can be diversified and the fun of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the decision ratio etc. of the movable object notice effect by the movable object notice effect determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of a movable object notice effect being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of a movable object notice effect being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of a movable object notice effect being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of a movable object notice effect being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in the case of the movable object notification effect and jackpot finalization effect of the modification 1 being performed. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in which the movable object notice production of the modification 2 is performed. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol variation start process in an production | presentation control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing of an active display change effect and a suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change pattern determination table, a false suggestion effect execution determination table, and a suggestion effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an active display change effect and a suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows a quasi-continuous production pattern determination table, an active display change effect execution determination table, and an active display change effect execution timing determination table.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, embodiments (embodiments) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, and a plurality of types that can be distinguished from each other in a special game as an example of a variable display game. The special symbol which is the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area formed on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. In a decorative symbol display area, which is a plurality of variable display portions, for example, three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And, in response to the start of one of the special symbol games among the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. In synchronization with the game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed.

  In the configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a first hold indicator for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified.

  The number of the first special figure hold memory is, for example, the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start winning that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening. When is established, 1 is added if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established. As a result, the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended.

  The number of stored second special figure is, for example, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B due to the occurrence of the second start winning that the game ball passes through the second start winning opening. When is established, 1 is added if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended.

  When the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is subtracted by one. When the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started, the second special figure holding memory number is decremented by one. As described above, the special game or decoration pattern is variable based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition for executing the variable display game such as display is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit state. For example, when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied, the variable display is suspended.

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. The term “special figure pending storage number” simply refers to a concept that includes all of the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, and the total pending memory number, and particularly refers to a part thereof. It may happen. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B includes, for example, a number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit values of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number, respectively. .

  A start winning storage display area may be provided in the display area of the image display device 5 together with the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B or instead of these hold indicators. That is, in the start winning memory display area, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number in an identifiable manner is performed.

  A movable effect member 60 is provided in the vicinity of a predetermined edge in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, when the display area has a horizontally long rectangular shape, the movable effect member 60 is accommodated inside or outside the decorative member that decorates the periphery of the display area in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the long side. That's fine. As described above, the movable effect member 60 only needs to be provided near the predetermined end of the display area in the image display device 5. In FIG. 1, the dashed line indicates that the movable effect member 60 is accommodated inside the decorative member.

  The movable effect member 60 only needs to constitute an effect model that advances to the front of the display area in the image display device 5 by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG. That is, the movable effect member 60 is movable between a retracted position housed inside or outside a decorative member that decorates the periphery of the display area and an advanced position that has advanced to the front of the display area. Also good. At this time, the direction from the retracted position to the advanced position may be a direction from a predetermined edge of the display area in the image display device 5 to another edge. In addition, it may advance until it reaches the other edge that is the advance position from the predetermined edge that is the retracted position, or it may be a partial advance position before reaching the other edge that is the advance position Also good. In addition, the movable effect member 60 is not limited to the one that can advance to the front surface of the display area, and is configured such that, for example, a predetermined end is pivotally supported, and an effect operation that swings in the vicinity of the display area or an effect that rotates. An operation may be performed. That is, the movement of the movable effect member 60 is not limited to a mode in which a predetermined operation is performed in the direction from the first position toward the second position, and the movement effect member 60 moves in the direction from the first position toward the second position. For example, a mode of swinging in the direction from the first position to the second position, a mode of rotating in the direction from the first position to the second position, and the like are included.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric tulip type hand having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric role shown in FIG. And a second starting prize opening.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not pass through the second starting winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can pass through the second starting winning hole. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the enlarged open state where the game ball can pass through the second start winning port, the closed state where the game ball cannot pass, or the passage difficult. It can be changed to a second variable state such as a normal open state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, and the first reserved memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value, the first start condition is To establish. If a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, the second start condition is To establish.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and prevents the game ball from passing through the big winning opening. . On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, and the game ball easily passes through the big prize opening. To do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass and advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes through the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when the gaming ball passes through another winning opening such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by passing the game ball through the special prize winning opening, which is disadvantageous for the player. There are two states.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed so that it can be changed. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered one of the general winning holes is detected by a predetermined general winning ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting operation handle is provided that is operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring for stopping the driving of the launch motor provided in the hit ball launching device.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls turning on / off of each LED constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control variable display of the first special diagram and the second special diagram. And a function for controlling the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol indicator 20 by performing on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol indicator 20. ing.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. , And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. In other words, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 and all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, decoration LEDs, etc. A lamp driver circuit for performing on / off driving is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch, and a count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11.
In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball as a game medium like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM 101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a RAM 102 that provides a game control work area. The CPU 103 is configured to execute a game control program to perform a control operation, the random number circuit 104 to update numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and the I / O 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random value may be updated by updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period. In particular, at least the game state, that is, data corresponding to the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. The RAM 102 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, a drive command signal as an information signal indicating a predetermined drive command command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable effect member motor 61 for operating the movable effect member 60. Wiring is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on a display control command or the like from the effect control PCU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As an example, VDP, CGROM, VRAM, LCD drive circuit, and the like may be mounted on the display control unit 123. The VDP may be a GPU, a GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command transmitted to the sound control board 13, a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14, a motor drive circuit 16 The command transmitted to is output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a launch motor provided in a predetermined hit ball launching device based on a predetermined operation performed by a player on a hit ball operating handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Thus, a game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area has a start winning that passes through the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. For example, the first start condition is established. After that, the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is used based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, because the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended. A special game is started.

  Further, when a start winning that occurs when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Thus, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is used based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended. A special game is started. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol starting condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 20 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. Whether or not to make the symbol variable display result a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged in the display area of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, decorative display different from the special symbols is variably displayed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “big jackpot”, and the bonus game state is controlled as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a special symbol variable display result, when a small hit symbol different from the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “small hit” and is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the specific gaming state. Is done. As a special symbol variable display result, neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed. When the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is “lost”.

  For example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, a special symbol indicating the number “1” is a small bonus symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol “−” is used. Lost design. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, in a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening and a winning ball is generated, a round game in which the big prize opening is continuously opened is executed. During a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the big winning opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit is reached.

When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, When the type is “probability change” and the big hit symbol indicating the number “5” is derived and displayed, the big hit type becomes “surprise”.
When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit time in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the jackpot game state. A regular round of time is performed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, a short-term open round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is relatively short is executed as a round game in the jackpot game state. Is done. The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round is longer than the first period in the normal open round. Becomes a short second period. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when the short-term open round is executed, the number of executions of the round game may be a second round number that is smaller than the first round number that is the number of executions of the normal open round. In other words, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is changed to the first state in which the game ball passes through the big winning opening in each round game as compared with the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed. It may be at least one of the second period shorter than one period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number.

  When such a short-term open round is executed, a predetermined number of balls can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period, etc., it becomes a big hit gaming state in which the actual payout cannot be obtained.

When a predetermined small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable display result is “small bonus”, and the small hit game state as the special gaming state is controlled.
In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open round, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation in which the large winning opening is set to the open state and changed to the first state advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state over the second period is repeatedly executed. After the small hit gaming state ends, it is only necessary to maintain the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied, the probability display may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as a predetermined number of variable displays is executed or the next big hit gaming state is started. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The short-time state is controlled to continue until one of the short-time end conditions is established first, among the fact that a predetermined number of variable displays have been executed and the next big hit gaming state has been started. .

  As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state before the small hit gaming state continues. However, when a special figure game with a variable display result of “small hit” is executed, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the probability change state or the short time state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state In some cases, the probability variation state or the short time state ends and the normal state is reached.

  In the probability changing state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is changed between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the second start winning opening compared to the normal state. For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal game to have a shorter variation time than in the normal state, and the probability that the variable symbol display result of each normal game is “per normal” in each normal game. The tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” is higher than that in the normal state. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by the control for increasing the length of time and the control for increasing the number of tilts compared to the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control. By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained.

  Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed. For example, when the high-opening control is not performed and the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state is finished, but the high open control is performed. Control may not be performed. Note that if the game state before the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable” is the probability change state or the short time state and the short time control with the high opening control is being performed, the big hit game state is terminated. Later, time-shortening control with high opening control may be performed.

  The game ball used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the score given corresponding to the number thereof have value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. That's fine. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The game value that can be given in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to paying out a game ball as a prize ball or giving a score. For example, the game value can be controlled to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Control, the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the big hit gaming state becomes the first round number that is larger than the second round number, the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the short time state is more than the second number The number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times that the big hit probability in the probability variation state is a first probability higher than the second probability, and the number of times that the big hit gaming state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state. It may be included that the game situation is advantageous to the player, such as a part or all of the fact that the number of the first continuous number of channels is larger than the second continuous number of channels.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the decorative display variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, the reach mode means that the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed when the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 form part of the jackpot combination continue to fluctuate. Or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are still displayed. The display pattern in which the decorative symbols fluctuate in the remaining decorative symbol display areas that are not stopped, or all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. In the display mode, the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Corresponding to the reach mode, the variation rate of the decorative design is reduced, a character image different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display mode of the background image is changed. In some cases, a presentation operation different from that before reaching the reach mode may be executed by changing the display mode of the moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach display. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the like are the operation modes before the reach mode. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the above.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And the possibility of being a “big hit” varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B are preset. Then, when a super-reach reach effect such as Super A or Super B is executed, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” is higher than when a normal reach effect is executed. In addition, among the reach effects of the super reach, when the specific reach effect such as the super B is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the reach effect of the super A is executed.

  During variable display of decorative designs, different from variable display effects such as reach production, for example, different effects from variable display operations of decorative designs, such as displaying a presentation image such as a predetermined character image or message image Depending on the operation, a notice effect for informing the player that the decorative display variable display mode may become a reach mode and that the variable display result may be a “hit” is executed. Sometimes. The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As long as it is executed before the reach mode is reached. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect may be any effect that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time depending on whether or not it is executed.

  As the notice effect by the effect operation different from the decorative display variable display operation, for example, a movable object notice effect for operating the movable effect member 60 is executed. The movable object notice effect is a notice effect that causes the movable effect member 60 to operate in a predetermined effect mode during the variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 3 shows the determination rate of the movable object notice effect based on the movable object notice effect determination table stored in the ROM 121. The movable object notice effect decision table decides whether or not to execute a movable object notice effect that predicts the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, and determines the type of movable object notice effect when it is executed It is a table that is referred to for In the movable object notice effect determination table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number for determining the movable object notice effect is determined according to the type of the variation pattern so that the determination ratio shown in FIG. Is assigned to any one of the movable object notice effects YPA1 to YPA7, which is an effect pattern of the movable object notice effect. In addition, it is not limited to the thing to which the determined value is assigned according to the kind of fluctuation | variation pattern, A decision value may be assigned according to an individual fluctuation | variation pattern, and it is in a variable display result and a variable display mode. A decision value may be assigned accordingly. When assigning a decision value according to the variable display result, for example, the decision value may be assigned according to whether the variable display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. When the result is “big hit”, the determined value may be assigned depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. In addition, when assigning a determined value according to the variable display mode, for example, whether or not super reach is executed, or whether it is “super A” or “super B” in the case of super reach A determined value may be assigned accordingly. As described above, in the movable object notice effect, the variable display result becomes “big hit” depending on which one of the plural kinds of movable object notice effects is executed, and is controlled to be in a probable state. It is only necessary to suggest a ratio that is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player such as reach is executed. Here, advantageous states advantageous to the player include, for example, control to a big hit game state, control to a special game state such as a probability change state, and the upper limit number of round games that can be executed in the big hit game state. The first round number is greater than two rounds, the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed in the short time state is the first number greater than the second number, and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is greater than the second probability. The first probability that the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, becomes larger than the second consecutive number of chunks. It may be sufficient to include a game situation that is advantageous to the player, such as a part or all.

  FIG. 3B shows an effect mode in the movable object notice effect determined using the movable object notice effect determination table. In this embodiment, when the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then moves back toward the retracted position, the movable effect member 60 rotates the movable effect member 60 in the form of rotating the movable effect member effects YPA4 to YPA7. The movable object notice effects YPA1 to YPA3 in a mode that is not allowed to be set are set.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then moves back toward the retracted position, a light emitting body such as a decoration LED incorporated in the movable effect member 60 is flashed. The movable object notice effects YPA6 and YPA7 in the mode to be set and YPA1 to YPA5 in the mode in which the flash is not turned on are set. Here, the flash lighting is a lighting mode in which a light emitter such as a decoration LED emits light like a strobe of a camera.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the movable effect member 60 is operating, that is, when the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position, and then moves backward toward the retracted position, The movable object notice effects YPA3, YPA5, and YPA7 in which the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable object notice effects YPA1, YPA2, YPA4, and YPA6 in which the effect is not displayed are set. Here, the effect refers to, for example, displaying a flashing predetermined image or a flashing predetermined image in a display area around the movable effect member 60 in the display area of the image display device 5 in accordance with the movement of the movable effect member 60. It is.

  Further, in this embodiment, the movable object notice effects YPA2 to YPA7 in a mode in which the movable effect member 60 moves to the advance position, and the movable effect member 60 does not move to the advance position, but to a partial advance position in the middle. A movable object notice effect YPA1 that only moves is set. For example, in the movable object notice effect YPA1, it may be suggested that the movable effect member 60 may move to the advanced position by swinging the movable effect member 60 up and down partially at the advanced position. Good.

  That is, the movable object notice effects YPA1 to YPA7 are determined based on whether or not the movable effect member 60 moves to the advanced position, whether or not the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 after the movable effect member 60 advances. What is necessary is just to perform the production | presentation from which the combination of production aspects, such as whether the movable production | generation member 60 rotates at the time of 60 reversal, and whether the light-emitting body flashes in the light of the movable production | generation member 60 reverse.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 3A, the movable object notice effect is executed only when the type of the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach (losing) or a variation pattern of super reach (big hit). If it is set and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (losing), the moving object notice effect is executed at a rate of 21%, and if it is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (big hit), it is possible at a rate of 99%. The animal notice effect is set to be executed. With such settings, when the movable object notice effect is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect is not executed.

  Further, in the setting example shown in FIG. 3A, only the effect mode of whether or not the movable effect member 60 rotates when the movable effect member 60 rotates is different among the effect modes in the movable object notice effect. Comparing the movable object notice effect YPA2 and the movable object notice effect YPA4, which are common aspects, in the case of the super reach (losing) variation pattern, the movable object notice effect YPA4 in which the movable effect member 60 rotates. In the case where the movable effect member 60 does not rotate, it is easy to be determined to be a movable object notice effect YPA2, and in the case of a super reach (big hit) variation pattern, it is more likely to be decided to be a movable object notice effect YPA4 than the movable object notice effect YPA2. . With such a setting, when the movable object notice effect YPA4 is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect YPA2 is executed. In other words, when the movable effect member 60 rotates when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable effect member 60 does not rotate. The same applies to the relationship between the movable object notice effect YPA3 and the movable object notice effect YPA5.

  In such a configuration, attention can be paid to whether or not the movable effect member 60 rotates when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, and the interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in the setting example shown in FIG. 3A, only the production mode of whether or not the illuminant is flashed when the movable production member 60 is retracted is different from the production mode in the movable object notice production. Compared with the movable object notice effect YPA4 and the movable object notice effect YPA6, which is a common mode, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach (losing), it is more than the movable object notice effect YPA6 in which the illuminant flashes. The moving object notice effect YPA4 in which the illuminant is not flashed is easily determined, and when the variation pattern is a super reach (big hit), the movable object notice effect YPA6 is more easily determined than the movable object notice effect YPA4. With such a setting, when the movable object notice effect YPA6 is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect YPA4 is executed. In other words, when the illuminator is flashed when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, the expectation of jackpot is higher than when the flash is not lit. The same applies to the relationship between the movable object notice effect YPA5 and the movable object notice effect YPA7.

  In such a configuration, attention can be paid to whether or not the illuminant flashes when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, and interest can be enhanced.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting effect of the movable effect member 60 itself, such as whether or not the movable effect member 60 rotates, is the flash effect of the movable effect member 60 itself. An effect mode of effect means other than the movable effect member 60 such as whether or not to perform is included.

Further, in the setting example shown in FIG. 3A, among the effect forms in the movable object notice effect, the effect state indicating whether or not the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances, and the moveable effect Comparing the movable object notice effects YPA2 to YPA7, which are different in combination with the movable effect member 60 and the light emitter effect mode when the effect member 60 is moved backward, when the variation pattern of the super reach (losing) is obtained, the movable effect is obtained. Among the movable object notice effects with the same effect mode of the movable effect member 60 and the light emitter when the member 60 is retracted, the movable object notice effect YPA3 in which the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances. Animated notice announcement effect YPA2 in which effects are not displayed is easily determined, and if it is a change pattern of super reach (big hit), a movable object notice effect Likely to be determined in a moving object when the announcement attraction YPA3 than PA2.
With such a setting or the like, when the movable object notice effect YPA3 is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect YPA2 is executed. In other words, if the effects of the movable effect member 60 and the light emitter are the same when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time of the advancement of the movable effect member 60. The expectation of jackpot is higher than when it is not displayed. The same applies to the relationship between the movable object notice effect YPA4 and the movable object notice effect YPA5, and the relationship between the movable object notice effect YPA6 and the movable object notice effect YPA7.

  Further, in the case of the super reach (losing) variation pattern, the image display device 5 from the time of the advancement of the movable effect member 60 among the movable object notice effects in which the effect of the luminous body is the same when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. The effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 from the time of advancement of the movable effect member 60 than the movable object notice effect YPA3 in which the effect is displayed but the movable effect member 60 does not rotate when the movable effect member 60 is retracted. When the moving effect member 60 rotates backward when the moving effect member 60 rotates, the animal notice effect YPA4 is easily determined. When the variation pattern is a super reach (big hit), the movable object notice effect YPA3 is more easily determined than the movable object notice effect YPA4. . With such a setting, when the movable object notice effect YPA3 is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect YPA4 is executed. In other words, if the effect mode of the illuminant when the movable effect member 60 is retracted is the same, the image is displayed from the time when the movable effect member 60 is advanced even if the movable effect member 60 does not rotate when the movable effect member 60 is retracted. When the effect is displayed on the device 5, the movable effect member 60 rotates when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, but compared with the case where the effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 since the movable effect member 60 advances. The expectation of jackpot is high.

  Also, in the case of the super reach (losing) variation pattern, an image is displayed from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances, among the movable object notice effects, in which the effect aspect of the movable effect member 60 is the same when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward. Although the effect is displayed on the device 5 but the effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 from the time of advancement of the movable effect member 60, the effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 than the movable object notice effect YPA5 in which the illuminant is not flashed when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. When the member 60 is moved backward, the animal notice effect YPA6 in which the illuminant flashes is easily determined, and when the variation pattern is a super reach (big hit), it is easier to determine the movable object notice effect YPA5 than the movable object notice effect YPA6. . With such a setting, when the movable object notice effect YPA5 is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the movable object notice effect YPA6 is executed. In other words, if the effect mode of the movable effect member 60 when the movable effect member 60 moves backward is the same, the image from the time when the movable effect member 60 moves forward even if the light emitter does not flash when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. When the effect is displayed on the display device 5, the illuminant is flashed when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, but compared with the case where the effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 since the movable effect member 60 has advanced. The expectation of jackpot is high.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if attention is paid only to the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher when the movable effect member 60 is rotated than when the movable effect member 60 is rotated. When the flash is turned on, the big hit expectation is higher than when the flash is not turned on. However, paying attention also to the effect mode from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances, the effect that is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances depends on whether or not the movable effect member 60 moves backward. Even when the member 60 does not rotate, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the member 60 rotates, and when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the big hit expectation is higher than when the flash does not turn on There is. That is, in this embodiment, when attention is paid only to the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, by combining the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 advances and the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. The expectation of jackpot may be reversed.

  In such a configuration, attention should be paid to the combination of the effect mode of the image display device 5 when the movable effect member 60 advances and the effect mode of the movable effect member 60 and the luminous body when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. It is possible to enhance the interest when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward.

  Further, in the setting example shown in FIG. 3A, the movable object notice effect YPA7 is set to be executed only when the variation pattern is a super reach (big hit). With this setting, when the movable object notice effect YPA7 is executed, it is definitely notified that the variable display result is “big hit”.

  FIG. 4 shows an effect operation example in which the movable object notice effect YPA3 is executed in the variation pattern in which the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed. In this example of the effect operation, the normal reach effect is executed based on the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode has become the reach mode, and then the movable effect member 60 is used in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The advance operation of the movable object notice effect YPA3 that advances to the front of the display area is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the upper edge of the display area that is the initial position to the advanced position that covers the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in front of the display area. What is necessary is just to operate | move and move in the movable production | direction direction. As the movable effect member 60 advances, an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 4 (B), the retracting operation of the movable object notice effect YPA3 in which the movable effect member 60 moves backward from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5 is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves without rotating, and an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Light emitters such as built-in decorative LEDs are usually lit.

  As described above, when the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances due to the execution of the movable object notice effect, the movable effect member 60 and the light emission when the movable effect member 60 moves backward thereafter. Depending on the effect of the body, for example, the variable display result may be definitely notified as “movable object notice effect YPA7”. It is possible to pay attention to the aspect and to enhance the interest.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D, a super reach effect is executed. The super reach effect may be an effect in which, for example, the ally character CA1 battles the enemy character CB1. Then, when the friendly character CA1 wins the battle with the enemy character CB1 in the battle effect, the confirmed special symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol and the confirmed ornament symbol that constitutes the jackpot combination are derived, and the variable display result is “ The player is informed that the game is a “hit”. On the other hand, when the ally character CA1 loses the battle with the enemy character CB1 in the battle effect, a definite special symbol that becomes a lost symbol and a definite decorative symbol that constitutes a reach lose combination are derived, and the variable display result is “ The player may inform the player that the game has been lost.

  That is, when a super reach (losing) variation pattern is designated based on the fact that the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, for example, it means that the player has lost the battle as shown in FIG. 4 (E1). The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of reach-losing combinations as shown in FIG. 4 (F1) is derived. On the other hand, when the change pattern of super reach (big hit) is designated based on the special figure display result determined as “big hit”, for example, the fact that the game has won the battle as shown in FIG. The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of jackpot combinations as shown in FIG. 4 (F2) is derived.

  FIG. 5 shows an effect operation example in which the movable object notice effect YPA4 is executed in the variation pattern in which the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed. In this effect operation example, the normal reach effect is executed on the basis of the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode is changed to the reach mode, and then the movable effect member 60 is used in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The advance operation of the movable object notice effect YPA4 that advances to the front of the display area is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the upper edge of the display area that is the initial position to the advanced position that covers the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in front of the display area. What is necessary is just to operate | move and move in the movable production | direction direction. With the advance of the movable effect member 60, a normal effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA4 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. In this effect operation example, since the effect image is not displayed with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA4, for example, the effect image of the normal reach effect is displayed as the normal effect image.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the reversing operation of the movable object notice effect YPA4 in which the movable effect member 60 moves backward from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5 is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves while rotating, and a normal effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A light-emitting body such as a decorative LED incorporated in the LED is normally turned on.

  As described above, even when the effect is not displayed on the image display device 5 since the advancement of the movable effect member 60 due to the execution of the movable object notice effect, the movable effect member 60 and the light emission when the movable effect member 60 moves backward thereafter. Depending on the effect of the body, for example, the expectation of jackpot may be relatively high as in the movable object notice effect YPA6. Therefore, it is possible to focus on the effect when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward. Can be increased.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, a super reach effect is executed as in the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. Then, when the change pattern of the super reach (losing) is designated based on the fact that the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, it means that the player has lost the battle as shown in FIG. 5 (E1), for example. The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of reach-losing combinations as shown in FIG. 5 (F1) is derived. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of super reach (big hit) is designated based on the special figure display result being determined as “big hit”, for example, the fact that the battle has been won as shown in FIG. The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of jackpot combinations as shown in FIG. 5 (F2) is derived.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of an effect operation in which the movable object notice effect YPA7 is executed in the variation pattern in which the variable display result of “big hit” is derived after the super reach effect is executed. In this effect operation example, the normal reach effect is executed on the basis of the fact that the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode, and then, as shown in FIG. The advance operation of the movable object notice effect YPA7 that advances to the front of the display area is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the upper edge of the display area that is the initial position to the advanced position that covers the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in front of the display area. What is necessary is just to operate | move and move in the movable production | direction direction. As the movable effect member 60 advances, an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA7 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  As described above, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 from the time when the movable effect member 60 advances with the execution of the movable object notice effect, and the movable effect member 60 rotates and the light emitter when the movable effect member 60 moves backward thereafter. When is flashed, it is definitely notified that the variable display result is “big hit”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), the retracting operation of the movable object notice effect YPA 7 in which the movable effect member 60 moves backward from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5 is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves while rotating, and an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and is incorporated in the movable effect member 60. A light emitter such as the decorated LED is flashed.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 6C and 6D, the super reach effect is executed as in the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. Then, since the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) is designated based on the fact that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, for example, it shows that the battle as shown in FIG. 6 (E) has been won. An effect image is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of jackpot combinations as shown in FIG. 6 (F) is derived.

  FIG. 7 shows an effect operation example in which the movable object notice effect YPA1 is executed in the variation pattern in which the variable display result is derived after the super reach effect is executed. In this example of the effect operation, after the normal reach effect is executed based on the fact that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol has become the reach mode, the predetermined edge of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. When the movable effect member 60 swings at a partially advanced position corresponding to the part, the movable object notice effect YPA1 is executed. At this time, if the movable effect member 60 operates so as to swing in the vicinity of the boundary portion between the inside and the outside of the display area formed by the upper side which is the upper edge of the display area in the image display device 5, for example. Good. As the vicinity of the boundary portion of the display area, the movable effect member 60 may be in a state of being hung on the front surface of the boundary portion, or may be in a state of having advanced to the inside of the display area so as not to be hung on the front surface of the boundary area. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7 (B), the retracting operation of the movable object notice effect YPA1 in which the movable effect member 60 is partially retracted from the advanced position is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves without rotating, and a normal effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Light emitters such as decorative LEDs built in 60 are normally lit.

As described above, when the movable effect member 60 swings at the partially advanced position in accordance with the execution of the movable object notice effect, it can be expected that the movable effect member 60 moves to the advanced position.
Further, in the case where the movable effect member 60 may swing without moving only partially to the advanced position, as in the movable object notice effect YPA1, the movable object in a mode in which the movable effect member 60 moves to the advanced position. In the notice effects YPA2 to YPA7 as well, the movable effect member 60 may be moved to the advance position after swinging when the movable effect member 60 is partially moved to the advance position. By setting it as such a structure, when the movable production | presentation member 60 rocks in a part advance position, the effect of expecting the movable production | generation member 60 to move to an advance position can be heightened.

  In addition, when the movable effect member 60 moves only partially to the advance position, the distance and time for the return of the movable effect member 60 are short, so even if the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 returns is different, the game In this embodiment, it is difficult for the person to recognize the moving object, and in this embodiment, the movable object notice effect corresponding to the fact that the movable effect member 60 moves only partially to the advanced position is acceptable. Only the effect mode of the animal notice effect YPA1 is prepared, and when the movable effect member 60 returns without moving only partially to the advanced position, it always becomes the same mode, and the big hit expectation is not suggested by the return method.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D, the super reach effect is executed as in the effect operation examples shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. Then, when the change pattern of super reach (losing) is designated based on the determination that the special figure display result is “losing”, it means that the player has lost the battle as shown in FIG. 7 (E1), for example. The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol having a reach-losing combination as shown in FIG. 7 (F1) is derived. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of super reach (big hit) is designated based on the special figure display result being determined as “big hit”, for example, the fact that the battle as shown in FIG. The effect image to be displayed is displayed, and a definite decorative combination of jackpot combinations as shown in FIG. 7 (F2) is derived.

  (Modification 1) In the above embodiment, the movable object notice effect YPA7 for notifying definitely that the variable display result will be a "hit" is included in the movable object notice effect of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, the moving object notice effect does not include a mode that clearly notifies that the variable display result is “big hit”, and the variable display result is different from the movable object notice effect. You may make it perform the big hit finalization effect which alert | reports definitely that it becomes a "big hit". In the big hit determination effect, an effect may be executed such that the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns toward the retracted position, like the movable object notice effect. In that case, what is necessary is just to make it the aspect when the movable effect member 60 returns toward a retracted position in a jackpot decision effect differ from any aspect in the movable object notice effect of multiple aspects.

  FIG. 8 shows that the movable object notice effect YPA7 and the jackpot finalizing effect of the modified example 1 are executed in the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) in which the variable display result of “big hit” is derived after the super reach effect is executed. A production operation example is shown. In the first modification, for example, in order to avoid a definite notification that the variable display result is “big hit” for the movable object notice effect YPA7, for example, the movable object notice in the movable object notice effect determination table shown in FIG. Even in the case of a super-reach (losing) variation pattern at the effect determination ratio, it may be set so as to be determined as the movable object notice effect YPA7. At that time, if the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (losing), the decision ratio is such that it is difficult to determine the movable object notice effect YPA7 than the movable object notice effect of other aspects, and the fluctuation of the super reach (big hit) In the case of a pattern, when the movable object notice effect YPA7 is executed by setting the determination ratio such that the movable object notice effect YPA7 is more easily determined than the movable object notice effect of other aspects, What is necessary is just to make it a big hit expectation degree higher than the case where the movable object notice effect of an aspect is performed.

  In the effect operation example of the first modification, after the normal reach effect is executed on the basis of the fact that the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol is the reach mode, the movable effect member 60 displays the image as shown in FIG. The advance operation of the movable object notice effect YPA7 that advances to the front of the display area in the device 5 is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the upper edge of the display area that is the initial position to the advanced position that covers the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in front of the display area. What is necessary is just to operate | move and move in the movable production | direction direction. As the movable effect member 60 advances, an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA7 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8 (B), the retracting operation of the movable object notice effect YPA7 in which the movable effect member 60 is retracted from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5 is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves while rotating, and an effect image associated with the execution of the movable object notice effect YPA3 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and is incorporated in the movable effect member 60. A light emitter such as the decorated LED is flashed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, after the super reach effect is executed, the movable effect member 60 advances to the front of the display area in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8E. The advancing operation of the jackpot finalizing effect is executed. At this time, the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the upper edge of the display area that is the initial position to the advanced position that covers the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in front of the display area. What is necessary is just to operate | move and move in the movable production | direction direction. As the movable effect member 60 advances, an effect image associated with the execution of the big hit determination effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8 (F), a retreat operation of the big hit determination effect is performed in which the movable effect member 60 moves backward from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5. At this time, the movable effect member 60 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retracted position. As the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the movable effect member 60 moves while rotating, and an effect image of a special aspect associated with execution of the jackpot finalizing effect is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Light emitters such as built-in decorative LEDs are flashed. Here, the effect image of the special mode displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 with the retreat of the movable effect member 60 in the jackpot determination effect is any effect image displayed in the movable object notice effect of a plurality of modes. It is an effect image of a different aspect. As a result, the effect image of the special mode is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as the movable effect member 60 moves backward, so that it is definitely notified that the variable display result is “big hit”.

  The effect displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 with the advance of the jackpot finalizing effect may be the same as the effect displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 with the advance of the movable object notice effect. . Further, when a big hit confirmation effect different from the movable object notice effect is executed as in Modification 1, the movable object notice effect may be executed a plurality of times during one variable display. With such a configuration, the player cannot determine whether the effect being executed is a moving object notice effect or a big hit finalizing effect until the player confirms the mode when the movable effect member 60 moves backward or Since it can be made difficult to discriminate, attention can be paid to the mode when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, and the interest can be enhanced.

  And, based on the fact that the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” and the fluctuation pattern of super reach (big hit) is designated, for example, winning the battle as shown in FIG. 8 (G) An effect image showing is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol of a jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 8 (H) is derived.

  (Modification 2) In the above-described embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption that the movable presentation member constitutes a production model that advances to the front of the display area in the image display device 5 as the movable object notice production. On the other hand, the movable effect member may constitute a sub image display device that advances to the front of the display area in the image display device 5. In this case, the operation mode when the sub image display device moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns toward the retracted position is the same, but the display mode of the sub image display device when returning is the first display mode. The ratio at which the special figure display result is “big hit” may be different between the case where it is and the case where the second display form is different from the first display form.

FIG. 9 shows an effect operation example in which the movable object notice effect of the second modification is executed. When the movable object notice effect of the modified example 2 is executed, as shown in FIG. 9A, the advance operation of the movable object notice effect in which the sub image display device 65 advances to the front of the display area in the image display device 5 is performed. Executed.
At this time, the sub image display device 65 moves from the retracted position in the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area to be the initial position to the moving effect direction toward the advance position that covers the front surface of the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to operate to move and advance. In this modified example, with the advancement of the sub image display device 65, an effect image of the pan PA1 hung on the string is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as an effect image accompanying the execution of the movable object notice effect, In the display area of the sub-image display device 65, a predetermined character CA1 is displayed as an effect image accompanying execution of the movable object notice effect.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9B, the retraction operation of the movable object notice effect in which the sub image display device 65 retreats from the front surface of the display area in the image display device 5 is executed. At this time, the sub image display device 65 may be operated so as to move and retract in the movable effect direction from the advance position to the retreat position. The movable object notice effect of this modification is displayed on the image display device 5 as the character CA1 displayed on the sub image display device 65 jumps out to the image display device 5 as the sub image display device 65 moves backward. It is a bread eating competition production that tries to hold bread PA1 in the mouth. Then, when the effect image of the successful mode is displayed such that the character CA1 jumps out from the sub-image display device 65 to the image display device 5 and the pan PA1 displayed on the image display device 5 is held in the mouth by the bread eating competition effect. Then, the confirmed special symbol that becomes the jackpot symbol and the confirmed decorative symbol that constitutes the jackpot combination are derived, and the player is notified in a recognizable manner that the variable display result is “big hit”. On the other hand, a failure mode in which the character CA1 cannot jump out from the sub image display device 65 to the image display device 5 due to the bread eating competition effect, and the bread PA1 displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be held in the mouth. When the effect image is displayed, the confirmed special symbol that becomes the lost symbol and the finalized decorative symbol that constitutes the reach lose combination are derived, and the player can recognize that the variable display result is “lost”. There are things to do.

  That is, when a super reach (losing) variation pattern is designated based on the determination that the special figure display result is “losing”, for example, an effect image having a failure mode as shown in FIG. Displayed, a definite decorative symbol of a reach-losing combination as shown in FIG. 9 (D1) is derived. On the other hand, when the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) is designated based on the determination that the special figure display result is “big hit”, for example, an effect image of a successful mode as shown in FIG. Displayed, a definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 9 (D2) is derived.

  When the movable object notice effect is executed by the sub image display device 65 as in Modification 2, the operation when the sub image display device 65 returns from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns toward the retracted position. Although the mode is the same, the display mode of the sub-image display device 65 when returning is different, and the ratio of the special figure display result being “big hit” varies depending on the display mode, so the display mode of the sub-image display device 65 It is possible to increase the interest of the player when the sub image display device 65 returns.

  In addition, the expected degree of jackpot notice given in the movable object notice effect by the sub-image display device 65 determines whether or not the special figure display result is “hit” according to the display mode as in the second modification. However, the ratio of the special figure display result to “big hit” may be notified according to the display mode.

  In addition, such a configuration requires a space for providing a drive mechanism therefor when, for example, changing the operation mode of the sub-image display device 65 to notify the big hit expectation degree, This is particularly effective when it is difficult to secure such a space.

  (Modification 3) In the above embodiment, when the movable effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns to the retracted position, the power is shut off before the power is shut off. Regardless of the manner in which the movable effect member 60 returns, the movable effect member 60 may be returned toward the retracted position in a common manner after the power is turned on again. In that case, it may be returned in any of the preset movable object notice effects, or may be returned in a different form from any of the plural kinds of movable object notice effects. Moreover, when returning with the aspect of the preset movable thing notice effect, it is sufficient to return the aspect with the lowest expected degree of jackpot among the plural kinds of movable object notice effects. In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the power is turned on again.

  (Modification 4) In the above embodiment, the motor drive circuit 16 operates the movable effect member 60 when receiving a drive command signal as an information signal indicating a predetermined drive command command from the effect control CPU 120. In a situation where it is not possible to perform the operation, the drive command command indicated by the received drive command signal may be invalidated. The situation where the movable effect member 60 cannot be operated includes, for example, that the movable effect member 60 is already in operation, the movable effect member 60 is not in the retracted position, and other effects when the movable effect member 60 is operated. It is conceivable that there is a possibility of interfering with the device, and that it cannot be confirmed that it does not interfere with other effect devices even if the movable effect member 60 is operated. For example, the motor drive circuit 16 may be invalidated by discarding the drive command command without storing it in a predetermined storage area, for example. Alternatively, the drive command command is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the movable effect member 60 is operated before the movable effect member motor 61 is driven based on the drive command command. When the movable effect member 60 cannot be operated, the drive command command may be invalidated by not executing the process for operating the movable effect member 60. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the movable effect member 60 and to distribute the processing load.

  (Modification 5) In the above embodiment, when the motor drive circuit 16 continuously receives a drive command signal as an information signal indicating the same drive command command, it is indicated by the drive command signal received later. The drive command command may be invalidated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed by invalidating a drive command command that is likely to be illegal.

  (Modification 6) In Modification 2, the image display device 5 can display an image in a predetermined display mode, and the sub-image display device 65 is visually recognized so that the image quality is different from the predetermined display mode. It is possible to display an image in a specific display mode that can be performed. For example, when an image such as a background image is displayed in a specific display mode on the sub-image display device 65, as in the above embodiment, After displaying the character CA1 as a predetermined image on the sub image display device 65, a moving display effect for moving and displaying the character CA1 on the image display device 5 can be executed. In the moving display effect, the character CA1 is displayed on the sub image display device 65. May be displayed in a predetermined display mode. The relationship between the predetermined display mode and the specific display mode may be, for example, high resolution and low resolution, color and monochrome, 3D and 2D, live action and animation, and the like. According to such a configuration, even if an image such as a background image is displayed in a specific display mode on the sub image display device 65, the predetermined image moving to the image display device 5 is displayed on the sub image display device 65. Since it is displayed in a predetermined display mode from the time when the image is displayed, it is possible to eliminate a sense of incongruity when the predetermined image is moved from the sub image display device 65 to the image display device 5, resulting in a production inconvenience. Can be prevented.

  (Modification 7) In the above embodiment, when the illuminant is flashed when the movable effect member 60 is retracted as in the movable object notice effect YPA6, the flash is not lit as in the movable object notice effect YPA4. It was explained that the expectation of jackpot is higher than On the other hand, when the production mode of the production means other than the light emitter is the first production mode when the movable production member 60 is retracted, and when the second production mode is different from the first production mode. The big hit expectation may be different. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a special sound when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the special sound is not output. In addition, when a special effect is displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, regardless of whether the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 since the movable effect member 60 has advanced, the special effect is displayed. Compared to the case where no is displayed, the big hit expectation degree may be made higher. Further, when the game effect lamp 9 performs special light emission when the movable effect member 60 is retracted, the big hit expectation degree may be higher than when special light emission is not performed. Further, a second movable effect member different from the movable effect member 60 is provided, and when the second movable effect member operates when the movable effect member 60 moves backward, the second movable effect member does not operate. The expectation level for jackpots may be increased. Also, a bar writer that rotates the LEDs arranged in a row to display characters and images as an afterimage is provided. When the bar writer is rotated and a specific character or image is displayed when the movable effect member 60 is moved backward, You may make it a big hit expectation degree become high compared with the case where it does not rotate. In addition, a projection mapping device for projecting an image on a predetermined structure or space provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 using a projection device such as a projector is provided, and an image is projected by the projection mapping device when the movable effect member 60 moves backward. When the video is projected, the big hit expectation may be higher than when the video is not projected. According to such a structure, the interest at the time of the reversal of the movable effect member 60 can be further improved.

(Modification 8) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns in which combinations of the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 advances and the effect mode when the movable effect member 60 moves backward are prepared in advance. In the above description, it is determined which of the effect patterns the movable object notice effect is to be executed, and the jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of the effect modes defined by the determined effect pattern. On the other hand, a plurality of advancement effect patterns in which the effect mode at the time of advancement of the movable effect member 60 and a plurality of reverse effect patterns in which the effect mode at the time of reversal of the movable effect member 60 are prepared are prepared in advance. It is determined separately which one of the advancement effect patterns to advance the moving object notice effect at the time of advance and which of the reverse effect patterns to execute the moveable object notice effect at the time of retreat. The big hit expectation may differ depending on the combination of the production mode defined by the advanced production pattern and the production mode defined by the reverse production pattern determined separately.
[Second Embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment (second embodiment) of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2A formed in a frame shape provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. The structure including the board 2).

  There is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 90 on the lower surface of the glass door frame 2A. Under the hitting ball supply tray 90, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 91 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 90 and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 92 for firing the hitting ball. The game board 2 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2A. The game board 2 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 2 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 10 is formed on the front surface of the game board 2 in which a game ball that has been driven can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 91 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 31A that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 31A has a predetermined operation by, for example, performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 31C (see FIG. 12) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 35C (see FIG. 12) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 31C is provided inside the operation stick of the stick controller 31A. 12). In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower pan body inside the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 12) for causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 90 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation by a player's pressing operation or the like, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). A possible push button 31B is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 12) that detects the player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31 </ b> B. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 10, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 31 </ b> A are attached in a vertical positional relationship in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and stick controller 31A as the position put to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 10, an image display device (effect display device) 5 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the image display device 5 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols synchronized with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the image display device 5 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas. However, the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and Three areas of the display area may be separated. The image display device 5 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the image display device 5 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display device 4A executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the image display device 5, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously provided for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 is not a big hit symbol, the result is “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the case where the display of the effect symbol is displayed as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the image display device 5 is shown. However, the effect performed in the image display device 5 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the side of the effect control microcomputer 115). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the image display device 5, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even when looking at the display screen on the image display device 5, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is currently in a variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red.The display color varies depending on the type of big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, or sudden probability variation big hit) When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of the big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit.) The 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, a case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the image display device 5 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the image display device 5. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the image display device 5. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  A first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 4A that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided on the right side of the central portion of the game board 2. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 4A is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display device 4A is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the right side of the first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device (second variable display unit) 4B that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display device 4B is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 4B is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are collectively referred to as a special symbol display device (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B). After passing (including winning), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) And a state where the big hit game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the image display device 5, a winning device having a normal winning ball device 6A is provided. The game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 6A is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the first start port switch 22A.

  Further, below the winning device having the normal winning ball device (first starting winning port, first starting port) 6A, there is provided a variable winning ball device 6 having an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B capable of winning a game ball. ing. The game ball that has won the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening, second start opening) 6B is guided to the back of the game board 2 and detected by the second start opening switch 22B. The variable winning ball device 6 is opened by a solenoid 17. When the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B (it is easier to start and win), which is advantageous to the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal variable winning ball device 6B than the normal winning ball device 6A. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the normal winning ball device 6A than the normal variable winning ball device 6B. In the state where the variable winning ball device 6 is in the closed state, the winning ball may be difficult (that is, the gaming ball is difficult to win) although it is difficult to win.

  Hereinafter, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  When the variable winning ball device 6 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 6 is very likely to win the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The normal winning ball device 6A is provided immediately below the image display device 5. However, the interval between the lower end of the image display device 5 and the normal winning ball device 6A is further narrowed, or the periphery of the normal winning ball device 6A. The nail is arranged densely, or the nail arrangement around the normal winning ball device 6A is difficult to guide the game ball to the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B has a normal winning rate. You may make it make it higher than the winning rate of 6A of ball apparatuses.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, a variable winning ball device 6 that opens and closes only with respect to the normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided. Any of the ball devices 6B may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, the number of effective winning balls entered into the normal winning ball device 6A, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory). A first hold display (first special symbol hold storage display) 25A comprising four displays for displaying. The first hold indicator 25A increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display device 4A is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, there are four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the normal variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second reserved memory number. A second hold indicator 25B is provided. The second hold indicator (second special symbol hold memory indicator) 25B increases the number of indicators that are turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Each time variable display on the second special symbol display device 4B is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total pending memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are awarded to the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B as images imitating game balls. They are displayed in order and displayed in such a manner that they can be recognized as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in a red frame, and the second reserved memory is blue. Displayed in a frame).

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is “red” that is red, “green” that is green, “blue” that is blue, and “white” that is white. Is provided. The reliability of the jackpot indicated by the hold display (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot expectation) is higher in the order of “red”> “green”> “blue”> “white”. For example, when a start prize is generated, it is determined whether or not a hold notice effect is to be executed, and when the hold notice effect is executed, which display mode is used as an upper limit to display the hold indication is a big hit. It determines based on the reliability with respect to this, and a hold display is displayed by making the determined display mode into an upper limit. Note that, regardless of whether or not the hold notice effect is executed, the hold display is started in the display mode of “white” when the start winning is generated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed is performed, and from the start of the change display to the hold storage until the end thereof, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In other words, the active display unit 18d displays an active display (a variable display-corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed. The active display is an image showing the reliability with respect to the occurrence of a big hit based on the fluctuation during execution. The active display is the same image as the on-hold display described above (an image imitating a game ball, and the display mode is red “red”, green “green”, blue “blue”, white A certain “white” is provided, and the reliability of the big hit is “red”> “green”> “blue”> “white”.

  The image display device 5 is for decoration (for production) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the effect symbol in the image display device 5 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the effect symbol on the image display device 5 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the effect symbol that reminds the jackpot on the image display device 5 The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 4B. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 19 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the large winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided on the left side of the game board 2. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 6 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 6 is a state that is advantageous from the disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be won in the normal variable winning ball device 6B). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 20, a general symbol hold display (normal symbol hold storage display) 25C having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a passing of a game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the usual figure hold indicator 25C increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time the variable display on the normal symbol display 20 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 10 of the game board 2, there are provided decorative LEDs that are blinked and displayed during the game, and at the bottom there is an out port 26 through which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 10. On the outer periphery of the game area 10, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The gaming machine includes a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to the player operating the ball striking operation handle 92 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch the game ball into the gaming area 10. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 10 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 10, and then descends the game area 10. When the game ball enters the normal winning ball device 6A and is detected by the first start switch 22A, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the first The first special symbol display device 4A starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the image display device 5 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal winning ball device 6A. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the normal variable winning ball device 6B and is detected by the second start port switch 22B, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the image display device 5 starts variable display of effect symbols. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit of a predetermined type is reached, the game state is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, Then, a transition is made to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B and the image display device 5 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state is extended, compared to a case where the high base state is not. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the state is always shifted to a high probability state. However, when a big hit is made, in addition to the high probability state, a so-called time-short state (for example, a low probability state, and The gaming machine may be configured so as to be shifted to a high base state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 6 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 20 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 20 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 20 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 6 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 20 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 6 is in the open state increases, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 11. FIG. 11 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 12, and the like. A game control microcomputer 100 that controls the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 11. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a ROM 101 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 102 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 103 and an I / O 105 for performing control operations in accordance with the program. In this embodiment, the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 are built in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O 105 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 100 further incorporates a random number circuit 530 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag and a high probability flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 102 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 101. Therefore, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 100 (or CPU 103) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 11.

  The random number circuit 530 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 530 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 530 selects and sets a numeric data update range selection function (initial value selection setup function and upper limit selection selection function), numeric data update rule selection setup function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 530. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data that the random number circuit 530 updates. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 530 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 100 is also mounted on the main board 11. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 17 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 6 and a solenoid 19 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 100 is also provided. 11 is mounted.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 100 includes a first special symbol display device 4A that variably displays special symbols, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first hold indicator 25A. Then, display control of the second hold indicator 25B and the general-purpose hold indicator 25C is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 11.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 12 instructs the contents of the effect from the game control microcomputer 100 via the relay board 77. The display control of the image display device 5 that receives the effect control command and variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 12, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 12, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 12 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 115 and an effect control microcomputer 115 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 115 is not backed up. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 11 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 152 and the input port 153. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the image display device 5 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the image display device 5 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 115 is mounted on the effect control board 12. The VDP 109 has an address space independent from the effect control microcomputer 115, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the image display device 5 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 109 in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads out image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 120. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 152 on the effect control board 12. The input driver 152 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 12 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 12 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 11 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 12 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 12 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 11 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 11 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O 105 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 31C of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35C via the input port 156. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 31B has been detected from the push sensor 35B via the input port 156. Further, the effect control CPU 120 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 31A has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 35A via the input port 156. . Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 155, thereby causing the stick controller 31A to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 155. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 154.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 103 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 103 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output) Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or out) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 12. (Step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 103 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 22). You may make it do. In this case, the presentation control microcomputer 115 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 103 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 103 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a counter value for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol) may be left as it is. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 103 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 11 is mounted). An initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 100 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the initialization control microcomputer 115 receives the initialization designation command, the image display device 5 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 530 (step S14). For example, the CPU 103 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 530 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is executed except in some cases. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, “a big hit without reach” (also referred to as “sudden big hit”) is provided as a variation pattern in which the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Note that, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed instead of reaching. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 115 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, and the general drawing hold display device 25C. Display control processing for performing control is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 103 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the big prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 20 in a predetermined order. The CPU 103 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 103 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 103 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data in accordance with the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 103 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 103 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display 20 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the variable symbol display state is changed after the variable symbol display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “ordinary shift” or “non-reach shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss pattern.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the image display device 5, the variable symbol display state is changed after the variable symbol display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 (however, in the case of sudden probability change big hit) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “suddenly probable big hit” in the image display device 5. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the image display device 5 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is a small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits need not be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, as shown in the present embodiment, as shown in the present embodiment, only the transition to the high probability state and the sudden probable change without the high base state are required. It is preferable to provide a big hit.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 accompanied with the effect of the pseudo | simulation series used when not reaching, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA1-5, normal PA2-3 to normal are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special A variation pattern of PG2-2 is prepared. In FIG. 15, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the re-variation is performed once when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns which are used when sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and which has a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once. Further, when using non-reach PA 1-5, it is a big hit without performing reach production. Hereinafter, jackpots that do not perform reach production are sometimes referred to as “sudden jackpots”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination) (2) Random 2 (MR2): Variation pattern type ( (3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine variation pattern (variation time) (For variation pattern determination) (4) Random 4 (MR4): Hit based on normal symbol (5) Random 5 (MR5): Random 4 initial value is determined (Random 4 initial value determination)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, normal reach and pseudo-ream Normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanying it, Super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type accompanied by super reach, and Non-reach CA 3-4, which is a variation pattern type including variation pattern accompanied only by sudden big hit It is classified into and. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 100 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 100) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 17A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 17 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 17A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and is also changed to a high base state. There are two cases: a state that is only transferred to a state and a state that is not transferred to a high base state (which is a low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit is reached, after the big hit game is finished, the high probability state and the high base state are entered. After the big hit, the probability variation state and the high base state continue until the variation display is terminated 70 times. In addition, when the odd hit suddenly becomes a big hit, the game shifts to the high probability state without shifting to the high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 70 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit of the sudden probability change big hit, until the end of the 70th fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is not transferred (in the low base state). There is a case where there is a certain variation state.

  FIGS. 17B and 17C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 17B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 17B and 17C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 530 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 17A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the normal winning ball device 6A, the second variable symbol variation is started by winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is high.

  FIGS. 17D and 17E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 17 (D) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the normal winning ball device 6A (that is, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 17 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the game ball winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine either “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, 10 determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, five judgment values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 5/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the normal winning ball device 6A, the second variable symbol variation is started by winning the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, a sudden probability variation big hit as a first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value There are cases where the 15th round probability change big hit “15R probability change big hit” and the 8th round probability change big hit “8R probability change big hit” are determined as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. Although the case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when it is executed is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, there are “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit” as the big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. The above jackpot type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 15-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “8R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to an eight-round jackpot gaming state, and shifts to a probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the base is shifted to a high probability state and has a high base. The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the special winning opening is less than the “15R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. Also, in the case of “15R probable big hit” or “8R probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the winning prize opening per round is long. The opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the high base state is not changed and only the high probability state is changed). Then, after shifting to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high probability state is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), there is no need to provide a small hit. Good. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, which corresponds to each of “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit” (big hit type Judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, as described above, only the jackpot type that shifts to the high probability state is included, but it is also possible to have a jackpot that does not shift to the high probability state (so-called normal jackpot). In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state, the high probability state is terminated by transitioning to the normal state triggered by a predetermined number of fluctuation displays. It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes a high-probability state by not changing a frequency | count limitation in a state but shifting to a normal state when a normal jackpot occurs.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a ball does not easily pass.

  In the present embodiment, when a 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability state and a high base state. Although it is configured to end, the number of variable displays from the transition to each gaming state to the end may not be the same in the high probability state and the high base state. For example, the high base state may be ended when the display of fluctuation 70 times is finished after the end of the big hit, and the high probability state may be ended when the display of fluctuation 71 is finished.

  In the present embodiment, when a sudden probability change big hit occurs, the high base state is not changed to a high probability state after the big hit ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the occurrence of the probable big hit, it is possible to shift between the probable change state and the high base state. Moreover, it is good also as determining whether it transfers to a high base state based on the gaming state at the time of sudden probability change big hit. For example, if suddenly probable big hits occur in the high base state, it shifts to the high base state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which winning has occurred.

  18A to 18C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, including normal CA3-1, normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, special CA4-2, and non-reach CA3-4 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 18A used when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit” and the big hit type shown in FIG. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA 3-1, normal CA 3-2, super CA 3-3 and non-reach CA 3-4 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132 B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied. In this embodiment, the non-reach CA 3-4, which is “sudden big hit”, is assigned to “8R probability variation big hit” or “15R probability variation big hit”, but is also assigned to “sudden probability big hit”. It may be assigned only to the 15R probability variation jackpot, or may be assigned only to the 8R probability variation jackpot.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 18B, in this embodiment, when “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” is set, a random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. If the value of is 150 to 221, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 8R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and quasi-ream, super reach and pseudo A variation pattern type not associated with a series is assigned.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the type of big hit is “suddenly probable big hit”, the control is made to the big hit state with 15R positive variable big hit or 8R positive variable big hit. Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  FIG. 18D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 19A to 19D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 19A shows the variation pattern type determination table 135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 19B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 19C shows a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit by 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the gaming state is a probability variation state. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C used in this case is shown. Further, FIG. 19D is used when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (a state from the end of the big hit due to the sudden probability variation big hit until the end of the 70th variation display). A deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is shown. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off-design. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 (C) and 19 (D), in this embodiment, even in the case of a probability variation state, if the fluctuation display after the big hit by sudden probability variation big hit is performed, the 15R probability variation big hit Compared to the case where the fluctuation display after the big hit is completed by the 8R probability variable big hit, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach is selected is higher. By doing so, in this embodiment, in the high probability state after the big hit by suddenly probable big hit, the player for the high probability state is displayed with high probability in the high probability state. Has increased expectations.

  In addition, a game for a big hit just before the end of the probability variation state is configured by increasing the ratio of the super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last variation display. It is good also to raise a person's expectation. In this case, for example, at the end of the big hit, 75 times are set in a high probability number counter and a high base number counter described later (for example, 75 is set in both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter, and 75 times The high probability / high base state may continue until the fluctuation display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75, the high base count counter is set to 70, and the probability variation state ends. Control may be performed with a high probability / low base state from the previous to the last fluctuation display, and control is performed with a high probability / low base state from the five fluctuations before the probability variation state ends to the last fluctuation display. In this case, the variation pattern type determination for detachment is performed by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment. Tables 135C and 135D may be selected (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). At the start of the variable display, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter remain at a predetermined number (for example, 5). ) Or less (whether or not the remaining number of probability variation states is within a predetermined number), and if it is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the super shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D with an increased reach ratio is selected. If the counter value is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation shown in FIG. May be selected. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 19, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 19C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type determination table for losing 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3, and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B used in this case, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is used. 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo-ream or the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, for example, a variable display result without a reach, a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, as shown in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 19B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  20A and 20B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table according to the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, super CA3-3, and non-reach CA3-4. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 20A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo-ream. Super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type including a normal CA3-2, a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach), and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a sudden big hit The case where it classify | categorizes into non-reach CA3-4 which is these is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 20B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 20B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 101. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 22 and FIG. 23 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. In the example shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable symbol special display. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 15, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 115 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 115 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 115 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, if it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if it is “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small hit”. For small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden probability change big hit start designation in the case of sudden probability change big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit” or “8R probability variable big hit” is ended. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 100 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden probability variation big hit end designation in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a total pending storage number subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending storage number, but does not use the total pending storage number subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has been won is transmitted as the hold memory information, and the total reserved memory number is also set. Although the case where the command for specifying the total reserved memory number to be specified is transmitted is shown, the effect control command transmitted as the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating the type of a big hit is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 115 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 24, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (design 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designating command (design 5 designating command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  FIG. 25 and FIG. 26 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number value is 90 to 99, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number value is 200 to 214, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 115 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-described variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each fluctuation in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to (D) and FIGS. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines the random value for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 103 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines the random number value for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1), the CPU 103 performs variation with “0A (H)” set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7), the CPU 103 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data. Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Also, for example, if it is determined that the “8R probability variation big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 1 to 74. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 241 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 103 sets “19 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 242 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 3-4). The changed category 30 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 103 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 103 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 221 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 103 sets “1A (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 222 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 3-4). The changed category 31 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 103 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the start winning, the CPU 103 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 115 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. Then, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 100 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 via the relay board 77 by 1 byte by 8 parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 115 mounted on the effect control board 12 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 22 and FIG. 23, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display device 4B, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol When controlling the production parts such as the device 5, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the production control microcomputer 115 can be prevented from increasing.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 22A for detecting that the game ball has won the normal winning ball device 6A is turned on, that is, the start winning to the normal winning ball device 6A is made. If it has occurred, or if the second start port switch 22B for detecting that a game ball has won the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is turned on, that is, a start winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs. If so, start port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 100 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, the game control microcomputer 100 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control microcomputer 115, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 115 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 115 controls the image display device 5 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 19 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 115, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 115, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the effect control microcomputer 115 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 19 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 115 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start-port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 22A is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 103 is an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. In step S1215, data indicating “first” is set.

  In this embodiment, when the first start port switch 22A is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the normal winning ball device 6A), data indicating “first” is set, and the first 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 103 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 22A is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), 2 When the start port switch 22B is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 29A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 29 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 29A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 29 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in order of winning based on winning in the winning ball apparatus 6B. Therefore, the order of winning the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B is stored in the holding memory specifying information storage area (holding specifying area). Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 530 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 29B) ( Step S1216). Note that in the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 29B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 29B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning presentation process in which a variation display result and a variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently performed are determined in advance at the starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 115. Control is performed (step S1219). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 115 each time a start winning is made to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the normal winning ball apparatus 6A occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation command A set of four commands, that is, a total pending storage number designation command, is transmitted in a batch within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1222). If the second start port switch 22B is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 103 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 103 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 530 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 29B) (see FIG. 29B). Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, hardware Random random R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 100 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 115. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S1232).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 115 every time a start winning is made to the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 103 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, the type of the big hit is determined, Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts to win the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the winning display is started before the variable display based on the starting winning is started. By executing the time effect process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, and in which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number falls. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. In 115, a continuous notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is displayed during the variation display of the effect symbol.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a 15R probability variation big hit before, an 8R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning for the normal winning ball apparatus 6A (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 103 determines the small hit determination table (first special) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for (for symbol). Further, when there is a start winning for the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (when the winning effect processing in step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 103 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 103 performs processing for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability change big hit, an 8R probability change big hit, or a sudden probability change big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, there is a case where the normal state changes to the probability changed state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 is determined.

  For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 103 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  For example, when the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the threshold value 79 is set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  For example, if the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 89 or less (ie, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 25).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 103 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 103 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 26). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning for the normal winning ball device 6A (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type determination table (first special) shown in FIG. It is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit” using the symbol 131a. If there is a start winning in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B (when the winning effect processing in step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “8R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets each threshold for jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, if the CPU 103 determines “8R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 74, 149, and 241 are set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 241 or less (that is, 150 to 241), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 241 (that is, if it is 242 to 251), it is determined that “19 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines that “15R probability variation big hit”, the thresholds 38, 79, and 221 are set. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold value is 221 or less (that is, 80 to 221), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 221 (that is, if it is 222 to 251), it is determined that “1A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 103 determines that “suddenly probable big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 26).

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 103 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 1A (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 115 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A continuous notice effect described later may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  31 and 32 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 103 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 103 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 103 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 29A) is data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 103 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. However, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variable display of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start a winning in the normal variable winning ball device 6B provided with the variable winning ball device 6 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the display of the variation of the second special symbol, in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. 30, the value of the random number for random determination (random R) is determined as the large hit determination in the low probability state. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 103 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved memory number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 103 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 according to the current gaming state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 103 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, if neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 115, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is used. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 115. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is sent to the production control microcomputer 115.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is performed on the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, that is, “first” indicating that the process is performed on the first special symbol. Or data indicating “second” indicating that the process is performed on the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, that is, data indicating “second” indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol. Is set as a special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 17) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining to be a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 101 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are changed There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 17A in the ROM 101 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state, and when the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining the big hit (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 17A, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big win gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display device as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability change big hit”, “8R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 103 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 17B and 17C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 17B and 17C, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 103 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 103 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variation big hit”, “ 8R probability change big hit "or" sudden probability change big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the big hit type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the big hit type. Do. Also, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 17D and 17E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “7”, and “9”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “8R probable big hit” is decided, “7” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 determines the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 18 (A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 determines a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 18D as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 19A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern type determination table for loss as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 19B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 19D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, it is a high probability / high base state), and the CPU 103 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 19C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is a normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, a variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 19C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 21). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 19C) used in a high probability / high base state and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 19B), a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 103 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 19A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the process of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 20) as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variations as the variation pattern based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 21) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). In the case where the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter to generate the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 19) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 19). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 103 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether the “reaching out of super reach” or “out of reach” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a continuous notice effect is performed by determining whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing display result designation command transmission processing (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 103 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 22) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, according to the type of big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command when it is “15R probability variation big hit”, and when it is “8R probability variation big hit”, display result 3 Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. Specifically, whether or not it is “8R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command when it is not the probability variation big hit, that is, when the probability variation big hit is sudden (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N of step S110), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), A control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 115 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit” is a data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 102 (stored in the big hit type buffer). Data).

  Further, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the image display device 5, for example) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). Also, the number of times of opening the winning prize opening counter (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times, “8R probability variation big hit” is 8 times, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is 2 times. ) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In the case of sudden probability variation big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). When the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 103 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the high base flag indicating that the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). When the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 103 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 115 (step S146). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit in the image display device 5) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, a big hit end designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 103 checks whether the big hit type is a 15R probability variable big hit or an 8R probability variable big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is a 15R probability variation big hit, an 8R probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”, “02” or It can be determined by checking whether it is “04” or not. If it is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167) and sets 70 to the high base number counter (step S168). Further, the high probability flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (step S169), and 70 is set to the high probability number counter (step S170). Then, the process proceeds to step S171. If it is neither 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (that is, if sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S169.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 115 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the image display device 5 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 22 and 23) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  40 and 41 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 120 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 120 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S651), the effect control CPU 120 uses the received symbol designation command for the first time in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize. As shown in FIG. 42, in the start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value of the total pending storage number (8 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process in FIG. 28, when there is a start win to the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B. In one timer interruption, four commands, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a total pending storage number designation command are set. Sent. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 42, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 42, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 is stored in the order of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command (in FIG. 42, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 42, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending storage number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 42 is displayed in step S663 to be described later every time the display of variation of the effect design is started (every time the sum pending storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 42, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4. It should be noted that the timing at which each command is deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start process, which will be described later, at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command, which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or small hit is determined in the winning presentation process (see FIG. 30) at the time of starting winning, the determination result of the big hit type, and the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654A). Then, a variable category command reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step S654B).

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 120 increases the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c by one, and updates the combined hold storage number display ( Step S656A). The received first start winning designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and the variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 120 increments the hold display in the total hold memory display unit 18c by one, and updates the total hold memory number display ( Step S658A). The received second start winning designation command is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designation command and variable category command are stored among the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store (step S658B).

  If the received presentation control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the presentation control CPU 120 uses the received total pending storage count designation command in each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 120 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S662). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display section 18c are lit up, the first hold display is deleted when the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts display of active display (step S662a).

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the data in the storage area 1 in the start winning command storage area, and shifts and stores the remaining data (step S663).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 performs any one of steps S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the image display device 5 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804), and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). .

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Small hit display process (step S808): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of the small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S809).

  Small hit opening process (step S809): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining opening, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808). When all the openings are finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (step S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (step S810): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, by the execution control CPU 120 executing the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step S8002, uses the chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as the temporary stop pattern in the pseudo-ream). , A combination of symbols that are not reach, but one symbol is shifted from one symbol, or a combination of symbols including special images that may not be displayed normally (may be images other than numbers). Is also determined.) When it is determined in step S8002 that the effect control CPU 120 executes the continuous effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance symbol symbol is used as the stop symbol of the effect symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the image display device 5. In the example shown in FIG. 46, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2 designation command or display result 3 designation). In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio for determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased (or the ratio to be decided is 100%), and “8R probability variation big hit” is set. In some cases, the ratio for determining the combination of performance symbols in which the three symbols are the same even number may be increased (or the ratio to be determined is 100%).

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the image display device 5 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode and change pattern of the active display (step S8003a). In this embodiment, the active display change effect that changes the display mode of the active display during the change of the effect symbol, and the change of the display mode of the active display (and the display mode after the change when changed) are suggested. Suggestion effects can be performed. For example, the active display change that changes the display mode of the active display after the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes (and the display mode after the change when changed) is executed at a predetermined timing. Production is performed.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion effect is always executed before the active display change effect is executed. However, the active display change effect is not always executed after the suggestion effect is executed. That is, there are a case where the display mode of the active display changes after the suggestion effect is executed and a case where the display mode of the active display does not change although the suggestion effect is executed. Hereinafter, the suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display changes after execution of the effect is also referred to as a true suggestion effect, and the suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change after execution of the effect is also referred to as a false suggestion effect. Since the true suggestion effect and the false suggestion effect are executed according to a common effect mode, it cannot be determined whether or not the display mode of the active display changes until the effect ends.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the execution timing of the active display change effect and the suggestion effect. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the active display change effect and the suggestive effect are produced at the first timing after the start of fluctuation and before the start of super reach, and at the second timing after the start of super reach and before the stop of fluctuation. It is feasible. It should be noted that the first timing and the second timing are not limited to the example shown in FIG. 47, and any method can be used as long as the relationship that the second timing is later than the first timing is maintained. It may be a proper timing. For example, both the first timing and the second timing may be set before the start of super reach, or both may be set after the start of super reach. In addition, the active display change effect and the suggestion effect may be executable not only at the two timings of the first timing and the second timing but also at three or more timings.

  In step S8003a, first, the final display mode of active display is determined using the final display mode determination table. In this embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode of active display a plurality of times by executing the active display change effect a plurality of times. The final display mode of the active display indicates what display mode is finally displayed (that is, at the end of the change) after one or a plurality of changes or without any change.

  FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the final display mode determination table. In the final display mode determination table, a determination corresponding to the final display mode is made according to the variation pattern (that is, “other than super-reach (out)”, “out of super reach”, or “super reach big hit”). Although values are assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 48, the ratio of assigned decision values is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the final display mode, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the active display is “normal mode (white)”, “first display mode (blue)”, “second display mode (green)”, and “third display mode (red)”. Although it can be any, determining that the final display mode is “normal mode (white)” means that the active display change effect is not executed. Further, determining that the final display mode is “normal mode (white)” means that the true suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display changes after the effect is not executed. However, even if the final display mode is determined as “normal mode (white)”, the false suggestion effect in which the display mode of the active display does not change after the effect can be executed.

  According to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 48, the final display is performed in descending order of the advantage of the variation pattern (that is, in the order of “super reach big hit”> “super reach out”> “other than super reach (out)”). The proportion determined in the order of “third display mode (red)”> “second display mode (green)”> “first display mode (blue)”> “normal mode (white)” is increased. A judgment value is set. That is, when the final display mode is determined to be other than “normal mode (white)” and the active display change effect is executed, the player has higher expectation, and the final display mode is “third display mode (red)”. ">" Second display mode (green) ">" first display mode (blue) "in order of expectation. By comprising in this way, it can be made to be interested about what display mode an active display changes with whether an active display change effect is performed, and an interest can be heightened.

  In step S8003a, when the final display mode of active display is determined, the change pattern of active display is determined using the change pattern determination table based on the determined final display mode.

  FIG. 49A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a first change pattern determination table (without super reach) used for a variation pattern that does not include super reach. FIG. 49B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a second change pattern determination table (with super reach) used for a variation pattern including super reach. As shown in FIG. 47, in this embodiment, since the second timing is set after the start of super reach, when there is a variation pattern that does not include super reach, whether or not there is a change in active display at the second timing, etc. A first change pattern determination table (without super reach) in which determination is omitted is used. Note that the second timing is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and may be any timing as long as it is after the first timing. Therefore, when the second timing is not set after the start of super reach. Even if the variation pattern does not include super reach, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a change in active display at the first timing and the second timing.

  In the first change pattern determination table (without super reach) shown in FIG. 49A, the timing at which the active display change effect can be executed is only the first timing, so the final display mode is determined other than the normal mode (white). In any case, the change pattern changes to the final display mode at the first timing. For example, when the final display mode is the first display mode (blue), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-2 in which the active display change effect is performed is determined. In the change pattern 1-2, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed prior to the active display change effect.

  When the final display mode is the second display mode (green), the active display mode changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-3 in which the display change effect is executed is determined. In the change pattern 1-3, prior to the active display change effect, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) is executed. When the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the first timing at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 1-4 in which the active display change effect is executed is determined. In the change pattern 1-4, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) is executed prior to the active display change effect. Thus, in this embodiment, in addition to the change in the display mode of the active display, the display mode after the change when changed is suggested by the suggestion effect.

  When the final display mode is the normal mode (white), that is, when the display mode of the active display does not change, the change pattern 1-1 in which the active display change effect is not executed at the first timing is determined at a rate of 100%. Is done. In the change pattern 1-1, since the display mode of the active display is not changed at the first timing, the false suggestion effect (for example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). Suggesting change). "(False suggestion) at the first timing and the second timing of the first change pattern determination table (without super reach) shown in FIG. 49 (A) and the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 49 (B). The description “effect” means that a false suggestion effect can be executed at the timing. Whether or not the false suggestion effect is actually executed is determined in step S8003b described later.

  In the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 49B, whether or not there is a change in active display between the first timing and the second timing, and the display mode after the change when changing according to each change pattern , And whether or not the false suggestion effect can be executed.

  For example, when the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) at the first timing at a rate of 30%. The change pattern 2-7 changes from the first display mode (blue) to the third display mode (red) at the second timing. In addition, at a rate of 30%, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the second display mode (green) at the first timing, and from the second display mode (green) to the third display at the second timing. The change pattern 2-8 is changed to the aspect (red). In addition, the display mode of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 2-9 that changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the second timing at a rate of 30%. Further, the display mode of the active display is determined as the change pattern 2-10 that changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) at the first timing at a rate of 10%.

  In the change pattern 2-7, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing, Prior to the active display change effect at the second timing, a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the first display mode (blue) to the third display mode (red) is executed. Moreover, in the change pattern 2-8, the suggestion effect which suggests that the display mode of an active display changes from a normal mode (white) to a 2nd display mode (green) is performed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing. Then, prior to the active display change effect at the second timing, a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the second display mode (green) to the third display mode (red) is executed.

  In the change pattern 2-9, since the display mode of the active display is not changed at the first timing, the false suggestion effect (for example, the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). Suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) prior to the active display change effect at the second timing. Is executed. Moreover, in the change pattern 2-10, the suggestion effect which suggests that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the third display mode (red) is executed prior to the active display change effect at the first timing. Is done. At the second timing of the change pattern 2-10, the display mode of the active display is not changed, but since the display is already displayed in the third display mode with the highest expectation level, the false suggestion effect cannot be executed. .

  A characteristic point of the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) shown in FIG. 49B is that the active display display mode changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. That is, it is configured not to be determined as a change pattern 2-3 that changes. In this embodiment, since the second timing is set after the start of super reach, it can be said that the expectation for the big hit is increasing. However, at such timing, if the first display mode (blue) with low expectation is changed, it is suggested that the possibility of a big hit is low, and the player may be awakened. is there. Therefore, at the second timing, after executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue), the active display change effect that changes the display mode is performed. By configuring so that the change pattern 2-3 to be executed is not determined, at the timing when the expectation for the big hit is increasing, it is possible to arouse the player by suggesting that the possibility of a big hit is low Can be prevented. Since the change pattern 2-3 is not determined, the change pattern 2-3 may not be provided in the second change pattern determination table (with super reach) from the beginning.

  In this embodiment, when the false suggestion effect is executed at a feasible timing, the false suggestion effect suggesting that the active display changes to a display mode having a higher one-step expectation level than the current display mode is executed. Is configured to do. For example, at the second timing of the change pattern 2-2, a false suggestion effect that suggests that the active display changes from the current first display mode (blue) to the second display mode (green) is executable. . Then, when executing the false suggestion effect at the second timing of the change pattern 2-1, the false suggestion effect suggesting that the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue) is executed. Will do. However, at the second timing when the sense of expectation for the big hit is increasing, the possibility of a big hit is low when the suggestive effect suggesting that the first display mode (blue) with a low degree of expectation is executed is executed. It is suggested that the player may be awakened. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the change pattern 2-1, execution of a false suggestion effect that suggests a change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing is prohibited.

  In this embodiment, the change suggestion 2-3 is not determined as the change suggestion 2-3 in which the true suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) is performed at the second timing. The execution of the active display change effect that changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing by prohibiting the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. And restricting the execution of the suggestive effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue). That is, at the second timing, only the suggestion effect that suggests changing to either the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red) having a higher expectation than the first display mode (blue) is executed. It is configured to be. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the interest of a game falls.

  In this embodiment, when the final display mode of the active display has a high expectation such as the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red), the second timing is higher than the first timing. The ratio of changing to the final display mode is increased. Specifically, when the final display mode is the third display mode (red), the rate of change to the third display mode (red) at the second timing is 90% (change pattern 2- 7 to 2-9), the rate of change to the third display mode (red) at the first timing is 10% (change pattern 2-10). By configuring in this way, it is often suggested to change to a display mode with a higher expectation level than the first timing at the second timing, and to suggest a change, and to improve the expectation at the second timing. it can.

  In this embodiment, the false suggestion effect is configured to suggest that the active display changes to a display mode in which the expectation level is higher by one level than the current display mode. It may be suggested that the display mode is changed to a higher display mode. For example, in the second timing of the change pattern 2-5, etc., the true suggestion effect suggesting that the expectation level changes from the normal mode (white) to the display mode higher than the second display mode (green). This is because, if there is no false suggestive effect that suggests the same change, it is determined that the change will be made when the effect is started. In the case of such a configuration, the change pattern 2-1 prohibits the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing, while the second display mode ( The execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the third display mode (red) may be allowed. In addition, in the case where the false suggestion effect suggesting that the degree of expectation changes to a display mode that is higher by two or more levels can be executed, the final display mode determined (or after the change suggested by the suggestion effect executed later) It is desirable to limit the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests a change to a display mode with a higher expectation than the display mode of For example, when the final display mode is the second display mode (green), if a false suggestion effect that suggests changing to the third display mode (red) at the first timing is executed, the second display is performed at the second timing. This is because a true suggestion effect that suggests changing to a mode (green) is executed, and the player may feel that the sense of expectation has been lowered.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 49B, if the final display mode is the same, it is configured so that there is no great difference in the degree of expectation even if the change pattern is different. However, the configuration is not limited thereto. Even if the final display mode is the same, the degree of expectation may be different if the change pattern is different. For example, it can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the change pattern is determined at a different rate according to the variation pattern instead of or in addition to the final display mode.

  When the final display mode and the change pattern of the active display are determined in step S8003a, the effect control CPU 120 uses the false suggestion effect execution determination table to execute the false suggestion effect at every timing at which the false suggestion effect can be executed. It is determined whether or not (step S8003b). For example, when the change pattern 2-1 is determined, it is determined whether or not the false suggestion effect is executed at the first timing.

  FIG. 49C is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a false suggestion effect execution determination table. The example shown in FIG. 49C is configured such that the ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is different between the first timing and the second timing. Specifically, the second timing is configured such that the ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is lower than that of the first timing. With this configuration, attention can be paid to the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  When the presence / absence of execution of the false suggestion effect is determined in step S8003b, the effect control CPU 120 uses the suggestion effect mode determination table to determine the effect mode of the suggestion effect (step S8003c). In this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode can be selected as the presentation mode of the suggestion effect, and the character A appears in the suggestion effect of the first mode (see FIGS. 53 (a1) to (a4)). ), The character B appears in the suggestion effect of the second mode (see FIGS. 53 (b1) to (b4)).

  FIG. 49D is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the suggestion effect mode determination table. The example shown in FIG. 49D is configured to determine the effect mode at a different ratio depending on whether the suggestion effect to be executed is the true suggestion effect or the false suggestion effect. Specifically, the ratio determined to the first mode is high in the true suggestion effect, and the ratio determined to the second mode is high in the false suggestion effect. By being configured in this way, since the ratio of change in the display mode of the active display varies depending on the effect mode of the suggestion effect, it is possible to focus on the effect mode of the suggestion effect and increase the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the expectation degree which is a true suggestion effect may differ in the case of the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion effect in the case of a 1st aspect, and the case of a 2nd aspect, Or, in addition, the degree of expectation that is a big hit may be different. For example, in addition to whether it is a true suggestion effect or a false suggestion effect, it can be realized by adopting a configuration in which the effect mode of the suggestion effect is determined at a different rate depending on the variation pattern.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the effect to be executed (step S8004). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step S8005).

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that is referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation aspect (including active display change effect and suggestive effect aspects) constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Has been. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 50 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the image display device 5 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component). Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern in the image display device 5, a command is output to the VDP 109. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect pattern to be variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 first decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variation time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, if the change time timer has timed out (Y in step S813), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8124). ).

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out of symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302).

  When the big win symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y of step S8303), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare production. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) Production device (image display device 5 as production component, various lamps as production component, speaker 27 as production component, and movable member 78 as production component and production according to data 1, movable member control data 1) The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 120 resets a predetermined flag. (Step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 120 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 44, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the active display change effect and the suggestion effect in this embodiment. 53 (a1) to 53 (a4), an active display change effect in which the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue), and the active display has a normal mode (prior to the active display change effect). An example is shown in which the suggestion effect (true suggestion effect) of the first aspect that suggests changing from the white) to the first display aspect (blue) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a1), when the variable display is started, the active display is displayed on the active display portion 18d (the active display in the normal state is displayed in FIG. 53 (a1)). Here, at the first timing, the character A (in FIG. 53 (a2) having a round head is held, holding the blue shining sphere 18e (simply displayed as “blue” in FIG. 53 (a2)). The suggestion effect in which 18f (displayed as “A”) appears is executed (FIG. 53 (a2)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 53 (a2), it is suggested that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) when the sphere held by the character is a sphere 18e that shines in blue. In addition, when it is suggested that it changes to a 2nd display mode (green) or a 3rd display mode (red), the sphere shining green and the sphere shining red are hold | maintained. In addition, when the suggestion effect is executed in the first mode in which the character A appears, the display mode of the active display changes compared to when the suggestion effect is executed in the second mode in which the character B described later appears. It is suggested that the ratio is high (that is, the ratio that is a true suggestion effect is high).

  In this embodiment, even when suggesting which display mode the active display changes to, the first mode in which the character A appears or the second mode in which the character B appears is executed (however, The mode of the held sphere is different). That is, regardless of which display mode is suggested, the suggestion effect is configured to be executed in a mode at least partially in common. Therefore, when the character A or the character B appears, it can be easily recognized that the suggestion effect is executed, and the entertainment of the game can be enhanced. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and for example, only when suggesting a change to a specific display mode, a suggestion effect that does not have a common mode may be executed.

  Next, the effect that the shining blue ball 18e thrown by the character A collides with the active display is performed, so that the suggestion effect is determined to be the true suggestion effect (FIG. 53 (a3)). Then, an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) is performed (FIG. 53 (a4)).

  In FIGS. 53 (b1) to (b4), the suggestion effect (false suggestion effect) of the second mode is suggested that suggests that the active display changes from the normal mode (white) to the first display mode (blue). An example is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (b1), when the variable display is started, the active display is displayed on the active display portion 18d (the active display in the normal state is displayed in FIG. 53 (b1)). Here, at the first timing, a character B (in FIG. 53 (b2) having a blue sphere 18e (simply displayed as “blue” in FIG. 53 (b2)) is held on the square head “ The suggestion effect in which 18g appears ("B" is displayed) is executed (FIG. 53 (b2)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 53 (b2), it is suggested that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) when the sphere held by the character is a sphere 18e that shines in blue. In addition, when the suggestion effect is executed in the second mode in which the character B appears, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes is larger than when the suggestion effect is executed in the first mode in which the character A appears. It is suggested that the ratio is low (that is, the ratio of true suggestion is low).

  Next, when the effect that the shining blue ball 18e thrown by the character B passes the upper side of the active display is performed, it is found that the suggestion effect is a false suggestion effect (FIG. 53 (b3)). At this time, the display mode of the active display does not change (FIG. 53 (b4)).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the specific display means that can display the specific display (active display in this example) corresponding to the variable display being executed, and the display mode of the specific display are the first. Aspect (in this example, the second display aspect (green) or the third display aspect (red)) and a second aspect (in this example, the first display that is controlled to be in an advantageous state than the first aspect) Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (in this example, an active display change effect) to be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including a mode (blue)), and a first timing during variable display ( In this example, after the start of fluctuation shown in FIG. 47, the first timing before the start of super reach and the second timing after the first timing (in this example, after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 47, before the stop of fluctuation). In the second timing) The suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect (in this example, the suggestion effect) that suggests that the display mode of the display changes, and at the second timing, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode. Suggestion effect limiting means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect to be performed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), a true suggestion effect that suggests changing to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing) Is not determined as the change pattern 2-3 to be executed, and as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the change pattern 2-1 changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. Execution of the suggesting false suggestion effect is prohibited). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened by suggesting that there is a low possibility of a big hit at a timing when the expectation for the big hit is increasing.

  In this embodiment, the change suggestion pattern 2-3 is not determined as a change suggestion pattern 2-3 in which a true suggestion effect suggesting a change to the first display mode (blue) is performed at the second timing. In 1, the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing by prohibiting the execution of the false suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing. Although the execution of the suggestive effect suggesting that is restricted, the restriction method is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the second timing is limited by lowering the execution frequency of the suggestive effect that suggests that the active display changes to the first display mode (blue) as compared to the first timing (that is, allowing a certain level). May be. In this case, at a second timing, it is allowed to execute the active display change effect for changing the active display to the first display mode (blue) to some extent.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIGS. 49A and 49B, the active display does not change to the first display mode (blue) at the second timing, and the change is determined so as not to give such an indication. Instead of using the pattern determination table, after determining by lottery whether or not there is a change in the active display at each timing, and the contents of the change, and whether or not there is a false suggestion effect, the first display mode ( In the case where the prohibition of suggesting a change to (blue) is satisfied, the restriction may be performed by executing a process for performing a re-lottery process, a process for canceling execution, a process for replacing with another effect, or the like.

  In addition, in this embodiment, after the variable display is started, a specific effect (in this example, super reach) can be executed to notify whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state). Specific production execution means. The second timing is configured to arrive in a period during which the specific effect is being executed (in this example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 47 and before the stop of fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the possibility of a big hit during execution of the specific effect from being suggested, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the specific effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means has a display mode (in this example, the second display) in which the display level of the specific display is controlled to be more advantageous than the second mode at the second timing. It is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect that suggests changing to a mode (green) or a third display mode (red). Therefore, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means is a plurality of effect modes with different degrees of expectation (in this example, the ratio of the active display display mode after the effect change (that is, the true suggest effect) and the jackpot expectation It is comprised so that the suggestion effect of the 1st aspect and 2nd aspect from which a degree differs can be performed (refer FIG.49 (D)). Therefore, it is possible to focus attention on the direction of the suggestion effect and improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means includes a first suggestion effect (a true suggestion effect in this example) in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect, and a display mode in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect. 2 suggestion effects (in this example, false suggestion effects) can be executed, and the second timing has a higher ratio of executing the first suggestion effects than the first timing (in this example, FIG. 49C ), The ratio of executing the false suggestion effect is higher at the first timing than the second timing, that is, the rate of executing the true suggestion effect at the second timing than the first timing. Is high). Therefore, attention can be paid to the suggestion effect executed at the second timing.

  Further, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect execution means executes the suggestion effect according to an aspect that is at least partially in common, regardless of which display aspect of the plurality of display aspects is suggested. (In this example, even when suggesting which display mode the active display changes to, the first mode in which the character A appears or the second mode in which the character B appears is executed. (See FIG. 53). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect.

  Similar to the active display, the normal display mode and the first to third display modes may be provided as the display mode of the hold display, and the display mode of the active display may be inherited from the display mode of the hold display. In this case, when the start winning is generated, the final display mode of the active display and the display mode change from the display as the hold display to the end of the variable display after the display as the active display. It is also possible to determine a change pattern indicating the above. Further, for example, when a start winning occurs, the final display mode and change pattern of the hold display may be determined, and when the change starts, the final display mode and change pattern of the active display may be determined. .

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the third embodiment (third embodiment) will be described. In this embodiment, the detailed description of the parts having the same configuration and processing as those of the second embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from those of the second embodiment will be mainly described.

  In this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation start process, if the variation pattern includes a pseudo-ream, a pseudo-ream effect setting process is performed.

  In the quasi-continuous effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a quasi-continuous effect pattern corresponding to the aspect of the effect operation in the quasi-continuous effect. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), it may be determined as any one of the pseudo-continuous effect patterns in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance at a determination ratio corresponding to the presence / absence of the big hit determination.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 54A, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern varies depending on whether or not the big hit determination is made. More specifically, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, whereas when the big hit determination is notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB is the highest. . When the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined. On the other hand, when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC may be determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines a temporary stop symbol based on the determined pseudo-continuous effect pattern, and ends the pseudo-continuous effect setting process.

  After executing the pseudo-continuous effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the active display change effect setting process.

  In the active display change effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is an active display change effect. At this time, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), it may be determined at a determination ratio according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 54B, the determination ratio for determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect differs according to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern. More specifically, in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB, each determination result has a determined value so that it is determined to execute the active display change effect at a higher rate than in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA. Assigned. As described above, in the determination process of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, while when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined. The determination ratio of the production pattern GEB is the highest. With such a setting, when the active display change effect is executed, the possibility of being a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed, and the player's expectation for being controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased. it can.

  Further, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEC, each determination result is determined so that it is determined to execute the active display change effect at a higher rate than in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEA and the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEB. A value has been assigned. As described above, when the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined, whereas when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is determined. is there. With such a setting, when the active display change effect is executed, the possibility of being a “big hit” is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed, and the player's expectation for being controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased. it can.

  It should be noted that the determination ratio setting example shown in FIG. 54B is not limited to an example, and any setting that increases the possibility of a “big hit” when the active display change effect is executed, compared to when it is not executed. I just need it.

  Next, when executing the active display change effect, the execution timing is determined. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), if a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance at a determination ratio according to the combination of the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations and the pseudo-continuous effect pattern. Good. When the execution timing of the active display change effect is determined, the active display change effect setting process ends.

  In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 54 (C), the determination ratio of the execution timing of the active display change effect differs depending on the combination of the pseudo continuous variation count and the pseudo continuous effect pattern. More specifically, in the case of the pseudo continuous effect pattern GEA when the number of times of pseudo continuous change is 1, the determination ratio at which the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the initial change is the highest, while the pseudo continuous effect is In the case of the pattern GEB, the determination ratio at which the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the first fluctuation is the same as the determination ratio in the first revariable display. In the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC, the active display change effect is the same. The determination ratio at which the execution timing is during the first re-variable display becomes the highest. Further, when the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is 2, in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA, the determination rate that the execution timing of the active display change effect is in the first fluctuation is the highest, while in the case of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB In the case of the pseudo display effect pattern GEC, the execution timing of the active display change effect is the second time when the active display change effect is executed. The decision ratio becomes the highest. Further, when the number of times of pseudo-continuous variation is 3, in the case of pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA, the execution ratio of the active display change effect is highest during the first variation, while in the case of pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEB In the case of the pseudo display effect pattern GEC, the execution timing of the active display change effect is the third revariable display. The decision ratio becomes the highest. Further, as described above, in the determination process of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern, when the big hit determination is not notified, the determination ratio of the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEA is the highest, while when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern is determined. The determination ratio of the production pattern GEB is the highest. Further, when the big hit determination is not notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC is not determined. On the other hand, when the big hit determination is notified, the pseudo-continuous effect pattern GEC may be determined. With such a setting, when the execution timing of the active display change effect is late, there is a higher possibility of a big hit than when it is early, and the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to the big hit gaming state Can be increased.

  Note that the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 54C is not limited to the setting example, and any setting that can change the execution timing of the active display change effect according to the combination of the pseudo continuous variation number and the pseudo continuous effect pattern. If it is. In addition, it is good also as arbitrary settings which can vary the execution timing of an active display change effect according to either a pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation frequency or a pseudo | simulation continuous effect pattern.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a predetermined variable display (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) that executes variable display a predetermined number of times from the start of variable display until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. The specific display is different in the timing at which the display mode changes depending on the type of the predetermined variable display (for example, the pseudo display where the execution timing of the active display change effect is determined according to whether or not the big hit determination is made) It is determined at a determination ratio according to the production pattern (see FIGS. 54A and 54C). Therefore, the production can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, about the structure shown in said 3rd Embodiment, only a part of structure may be applied to the game machine shown in 2nd Embodiment, or all structures are 2nd implementation. You may apply to the game machine shown with the form of. Further, the configuration shown in the second embodiment and the configuration shown in the third embodiment may be combined and applied to a gaming machine. For example, in the configuration shown in the third embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed in addition to the active display change effect, and as the timing comes later (for example, during the third revariable display> second revariable display) Medium> in order of the first re-variable display), the execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode is changed to a low display mode and the active display change effect changing to the display mode having a low level of expectation is restricted. May be.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the effect control board 12, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the image display device 5 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  A configuration example combining the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above, or the combination of the first embodiment and the third embodiment will be described. The structural example which combined 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment or 1st Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment is as follows, for example.

  A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display (for example, variable display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player And the like, and a specific display means (for example, active display) capable of displaying a movable display means (for example, the movable effect member 60) and a specific display (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed. 18d), the display mode of the specific display is the first mode (for example, the second display mode (green) or the third display mode (red)) and the degree of expectation that is controlled to be in the above-described advantageous state than the first mode. Change effect execution means (for example, an active display change effect) that can be changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including a low second mode (for example, the first display mode (blue)) , Production system For which the microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105), the first timing during variable display (for example, the first timing after the start of fluctuation and before the start of super reach shown in FIG. 47), and the first timing Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes at the subsequent second timing (for example, the second timing after the start of super reach shown in FIG. 47 and before the stop of fluctuation). (For example, the portion in which the production control microcomputer 115 executes steps S8006 and S8105) and the suggestion production suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode at the second timing. Suggestive effect restricting means (for example, as shown in FIG. Thus, the change suggestion pattern 2-3 is not decided as the change pattern 2-3 in which the true suggestion effect that suggests the change to the first display mode (blue) is executed, and as shown in FIG. In the second timing, the execution of the false suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode is changed to the first display mode (blue) is prohibited), and the movement effect means is directed from the first position to the second position. In the case where the mode when returning to the first position after moving in the first mode is the first mode and in the second mode different from the first mode, the advantageous state is controlled. The ratio is different (for example, the case where the moving effect member 60 moves from the retracted position toward the advanced position and then returns toward the retracted position is possible when returning to the retracted position while rotating as in the movable object notice effects YPA4 to YPA7. Animal notice YPA1 A gaming machine characterized in that the expectation degree of jackpot is different in the case of returning without rotating as in YPA3).

  In the gaming machine of this configuration example, when the movement effect unit moves from the first position toward the second position and then returns toward the first position, the first aspect and the second aspect The proportion controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the case. For this reason, the expectation controlled to an advantageous state changes with the modes when returning from the second position to the second position. As a result, it is possible to increase attention to the mode when returning to the first position after the movement effect means moves to the second position, so that the player's game interests when returning after the movement effect means moves Can be increased. Moreover, in performing the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes, the execution of the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode is limited at the second timing. Yes. Although the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state increases, if the specific display changes at the second timing after the first timing, the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state further increases. Here, if the change in the specific display at the second timing is a change to the second mode in which the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state is low, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state is not increased, resulting in a decrease in interest There are concerns that lead to it. In this regard, in the gaming machine of this configuration example, at the second timing, execution of a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode is restricted. For this reason, since the suggestion to the 2nd aspect in a 2nd timing decreases, it can suppress that the expectation level controlled to an advantageous state becomes low, and it prevents that the interest of a game falls. it can. Thus, the improvement of the interest can be enhanced when the moving effect means returns and before the specific display changes.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the suggestion effect may be an effect accompanied by movement of the movement effect means. In this example, since the display mode of the specific display is suggested by the mode of the movement effect means, it can contribute to the improvement of interest. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the mode when the movement effect unit returns to the second position and the change in the specific display, the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state in a composite manner. It can give a sense of expectation and contribute to the improvement of interest. At this time, since the suggestion of the change to the second mode at the second timing is reduced, it is possible to suppress the expectation level to be controlled to be in an advantageous state, so that the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. At this time, based on a mode in which the movement effect unit returns from the second position to the first position, a change in the display mode of the specific display may be suggested, or when moving from the first position to the second position. A change in the display mode of the specific display may be suggested based on the mode. When suggesting the display mode of the specific display based on the mode in which the movement effect means returns from the second position to the first position, the mode according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state and the change of the display mode of the specific display May be a common aspect or a different aspect. For example, as shown in the above embodiment, the aspect according to the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is whether the movable effect member 60 rotates and returns without rotating. The mode according to the change may be the emission color of the movable effect member 60 that returns to the first position.

  Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the specific display may be hidden by the movement effect unit when the movement effect unit is located in any of the movable ranges. In this example, when the display mode of the specific display is changed, the specific display may be changed when the specific display is hidden by the moved moving effect means. In this example, when the specific display once hidden by the movement effect means becomes visible again, the player can enjoy the pleasure of whether or not the specific display has changed. can do.

  In the gaming machine having the above configuration example, the specific display may be displayed on the movement effect means. In this case, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like as a display device may be attached to the moving effect means so that the display device can be moved and a specific display is displayed on the display device. Further, when the specific display is displayed on the movement effect means, the display of the specific display cannot be visually recognized by passing behind the predetermined obstacle while the movement effect means is moving. Good. In this case, the specific display may be changed when the specific display displayed on the movement effect means is hidden. In this example, when the specific display once hidden by the obstacle becomes visible again, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of whether or not the specific display has changed, thus contributing to the improvement of interest. be able to.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 100 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 115. However, the game control microcomputer 100 may be connected to another board (for example, FIG. Or a sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 115 on the effect control board 12 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the image display device 5. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 115 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 100 in each of the above-described embodiments. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the driver board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the change is started in order to notify the change control pattern 115 indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. to the effect control microcomputer 115. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 115 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 115 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 115 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols such as “1” to “9”, production symbols, and normal symbols are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed is shown. It is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  Also, in each of the above embodiments, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that there are a probable big hit and a normal big hit as the big hit type, and that the big hit type is determined to be a promiscuous big hit. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in each of the above embodiments can be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a certain change state after the completion.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball as a game medium to a game area to perform a predetermined game, and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result, for example, a plurality of types of identification information The game can be applied to any game machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of a symbol and can give a predetermined game value based on the game result. More specifically, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays each of a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified is derived. The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one game is completed by being displayed and a winning can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment is obtained by the cooperation of hardware resources including a configuration for executing a movable object notice effect and software for performing a predetermined process. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that one part or all part of the characteristic which 1 may have may be provided. In the movable object notice effect, when the movable effect member moves from the first position toward the second position and then returns toward the first position, the first aspect, Need only be different in the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player in the case of different second mode. Here, the advantageous state advantageous to the player in the slot machine is a big game, a big bonus, a regular bonus, a replay time with a high replay win rate, and an assist time in which a navigation effect is executed when a target role for navigation is won It is only necessary to include a game situation that is advantageous to the player, such as part or all of the assist replay time that is the assist time in the replay time.

  Further, in the above-described embodiments and modifications, it has been described that the advantageous state advantageous to the player includes a game situation advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the advantageous state advantageous to the player is advantageous to the player such that the number of performance points acquired is the first acquired number larger than the second acquired number and a predetermined privilege is given. It may be included that a predetermined value is given.

  Here, the number of effect points acquired may be a total value of effect points given to the player when, for example, a notice effect or reach effect that is a specific effect mode is executed. The notice effect or reach effect that is a specific effect aspect may be an effect that is set so that the execution ratio is lower than the notice effect or reach effect that is another effect aspect and has a low appearance frequency. Alternatively, the number of effect points acquired may be the total value of effect points given to the player when the number of executions of variable display reaches a predetermined number. Alternatively, the number of effect points acquired may be the total value of effect points given to the player as a result of executing a predetermined mini game on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the slot machine, or the terminal device. In the terminal device, it is only necessary that the player can execute a mini game imitating a game by the pachinko gaming machine 1 by downloading and executing a predetermined game application program or accessing a predetermined Web page. In addition, it is not limited to the case where a notice effect or reach effect that is a specific effect aspect is executed, and when a predetermined effect such as some notice effect or reach effect is executed, an effect point may be given to the player. . The number of executions of variable display, which is a condition for giving effect points, may be “1” or “10”, for example. In this way, predetermined execution such as execution of a predetermined effect, the number of executions of variable display having reached a predetermined number, execution of a predetermined mini game, or a combination of some or all of them is predetermined. It is only necessary that the player can be awarded based on the established point grant condition. Further, even when the point granting condition is satisfied, whether or not to provide the effect points, the number of the effect points to be provided, and the like may be determined at a predetermined ratio.

  That is, as a state that is advantageous for the player, in order for the number of performance points to be acquired to be the first acquired number that is greater than the second acquired number, the first ratio in which the point granting condition is satisfied is higher than the second ratio. In addition to the above, when the point granting condition is satisfied, the ratio determined to give the stage point is set to the first ratio higher than the second ratio, or the quantity of the stage points to be given when the point condition is satisfied. To be a first quantity larger than the second quantity.

  In addition, about each structure shown in said 1st-3rd embodiment, even if it applies only the one part structure to the game machine shown in other embodiment among the 1st-3rd embodiment. All the configurations may be applied to the gaming machines shown in the other embodiments of the first to third embodiments.

1 Pachinko machine

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Movable movement means, and
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display being executed;
It is possible to execute a change effect in which the display mode of the specific display is changed to any one of a plurality of display modes including the first mode and the second mode that is controlled to be in the above-mentioned advantageous state than the first mode. Change execution execution means,
A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes at a first timing during variable display and a second timing after the first timing;
Suggestion effect limiting means for restricting execution of the suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes to the second mode at the second timing;
With
A case where the mode when the movement effecting unit moves from the first position toward the second position and then returns toward the first position is the first mode, and a second mode different from the first mode. The gaming machine is characterized in that the proportion controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the mode.

Images